Add --fix-stm32l4xx-629360 to the ARM linker to enable a link-time workaround for...
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set SPU
38 @set TICOFF
39 @set WIN32
40 @set XTENSA
41 @end ifset
42 @c man end
43
44 @ifnottex
45 @dircategory Software development
46 @direntry
47 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
48 @end direntry
49 @end ifnottex
50
51 @copying
52 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55 @end ifset
56 version @value{VERSION}.
57
58 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59
60 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
61 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
62 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
65 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
66 @end copying
67 @iftex
68 @finalout
69 @setchapternewpage odd
70 @settitle The GNU linker
71 @titlepage
72 @title The GNU linker
73 @sp 1
74 @subtitle @code{ld}
75 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77 @end ifset
78 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79 @author Steve Chamberlain
80 @author Ian Lance Taylor
81 @page
82
83 @tex
84 {\parskip=0pt
85 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
87 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
88 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89 }
90 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91 @end tex
92
93 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
94 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
95 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2015 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
96
97 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
98 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
99 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
102 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
103 @c man end
104
105 @end titlepage
106 @end iftex
107 @contents
108 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
110 @ifnottex
111 @node Top
112 @top LD
113 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116 @end ifset
117 version @value{VERSION}.
118
119 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
120 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
122
123 @menu
124 * Overview:: Overview
125 * Invocation:: Invocation
126 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127 @ifset GENERIC
128 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129 @end ifset
130 @ifclear GENERIC
131 @ifset H8300
132 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133 @end ifset
134 @ifset Renesas
135 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
136 @end ifset
137 @ifset I960
138 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139 @end ifset
140 @ifset ARM
141 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142 @end ifset
143 @ifset M68HC11
144 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145 @end ifset
146 @ifset HPPA
147 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148 @end ifset
149 @ifset M68K
150 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151 @end ifset
152 @ifset MIPS
153 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154 @end ifset
155 @ifset POWERPC
156 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157 @end ifset
158 @ifset POWERPC64
159 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160 @end ifset
161 @ifset SPU
162 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163 @end ifset
164 @ifset TICOFF
165 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166 @end ifset
167 @ifset WIN32
168 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169 @end ifset
170 @ifset XTENSA
171 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172 @end ifset
173 @end ifclear
174 @ifclear SingleFormat
175 * BFD:: BFD
176 @end ifclear
177 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
181 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
182 * LD Index:: LD Index
183 @end menu
184 @end ifnottex
185
186 @node Overview
187 @chapter Overview
188
189 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190 @cindex what is this?
191
192 @ifset man
193 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
194 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
195 @c man end
196
197 @c man begin SEEALSO
198 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200 @file{ld}.
201 @c man end
202 @end ifset
203
204 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
206 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
207 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
208 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
209
210 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
211 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
214 @ifset man
215 @c For the man only
216 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
217 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
219 @end ifset
220
221 @ifclear SingleFormat
222 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
224 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227 @end ifclear
228
229 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
232 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
233 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
235 @c man end
236
237 @node Invocation
238 @chapter Invocation
239
240 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
242 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
243 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244 you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
246 @c man end
247
248 @ifset UsesEnvVars
249 @menu
250 * Options:: Command Line Options
251 * Environment:: Environment Variables
252 @end menu
253
254 @node Options
255 @section Command Line Options
256 @end ifset
257
258 @cindex command line
259 @cindex options
260
261 @c man begin OPTIONS
262
263 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265 @cindex standard Unix system
266 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
267 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268 link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270 @smallexample
271 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272 @end smallexample
273
274 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
275 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
279 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
280 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
285 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287 noted in the descriptions below.
288
289 @cindex object files
290 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293 an option and its argument.
294
295 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299 message @samp{No input files}.
300
301 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
302 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
307 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
312
313 For options whose names are a single letter,
314 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316 option that requires them.
317
318 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
319 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
320 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
321 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
322 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
323 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325 output.
326
327 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332 accepted.
333
334 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
336 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337 compiler driver) like this:
338
339 @smallexample
340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
341 @end smallexample
342
343 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
344 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351 @smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353 @end smallexample
354
355 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356 linker:
357
358 @table @gcctabopt
359 @include at-file.texi
360
361 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
362 @item -a @var{keyword}
363 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
369 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
376 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
377 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
378 interface.
379
380 @ifset I960
381 @cindex architectures
382 @kindex -A @var{arch}
383 @item -A @var{architecture}
384 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
386 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
388 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
390 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
391 family}, for details.
392
393 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
394 other architecture families.
395 @end ifset
396
397 @ifclear SingleFormat
398 @cindex binary input format
399 @kindex -b @var{format}
400 @kindex --format=@var{format}
401 @cindex input format
402 @cindex input format
403 @item -b @var{input-format}
404 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
405 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
407 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
408 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
409 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
410 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
411 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415 @xref{BFD}.
416
417 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419 linking object files of different formats), by including
420 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
421 particular format.
422
423 The default format is taken from the environment variable
424 @code{GNUTARGET}.
425 @ifset UsesEnvVars
426 @xref{Environment}.
427 @end ifset
428 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
429 @code{TARGET};
430 @ifclear man
431 see @ref{Format Commands}.
432 @end ifclear
433 @end ifclear
434
435 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437 @cindex compatibility, MRI
438 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
440 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
441 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
442 @ifclear man
443 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444 @end ifclear
445 @ifset man
446 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447 @end ifset
448 Introduce MRI script files with
449 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
450 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
452 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454 @cindex common allocation
455 @kindex -d
456 @kindex -dc
457 @kindex -dp
458 @item -d
459 @itemx -dc
460 @itemx -dp
461 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
467 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
476 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
477
478 @cindex entry point, from command line
479 @kindex -e @var{entry}
480 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
481 @item -e @var{entry}
482 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
491 @kindex --exclude-libs
492 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
494 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
495 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500 be treated as hidden.
501
502 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513 regardless of this option.
514
515 @cindex dynamic symbol table
516 @kindex -E
517 @kindex --export-dynamic
518 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
519 @item -E
520 @itemx --export-dynamic
521 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
522 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
531
532 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535 linking the program itself.
536
537 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
538 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
539 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
540
541 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
545 @ifclear SingleFormat
546 @cindex big-endian objects
547 @cindex endianness
548 @kindex -EB
549 @item -EB
550 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552 @cindex little-endian objects
553 @kindex -EL
554 @item -EL
555 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
556 @end ifclear
557
558 @kindex -f @var{name}
559 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560 @item -f @var{name}
561 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
562 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575 machine specific performance.
576
577 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
580 @kindex -F @var{name}
581 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
582 @item -F @var{name}
583 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
584 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595 @var{name}.
596
597 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
598 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
599 object files.
600 @ifclear SingleFormat
601 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
602 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
603 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
604 environment variable.
605 @end ifclear
606 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607 creating an ELF shared object.
608
609 @cindex finalization function
610 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
611 @item -fini=@var{name}
612 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615 the function to call.
616
617 @kindex -g
618 @item -g
619 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
621 @kindex -G @var{value}
622 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
623 @cindex object size
624 @item -G @var{value}
625 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
628 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
629 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631 @cindex runtime library name
632 @kindex -h @var{name}
633 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
634 @item -h @var{name}
635 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
636 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642 @kindex -i
643 @cindex incremental link
644 @item -i
645 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
647 @cindex initialization function
648 @kindex -init=@var{name}
649 @item -init=@var{name}
650 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653 function to call.
654
655 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
656 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
657 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
658 @item -l @var{namespec}
659 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
663 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
664 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
665
666 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
667 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673 @var{filename}.
674
675 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
682 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
683 archives multiple times.
684
685 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687 @ifset GENERIC
688 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
689 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
690 behaviour of the AIX linker.
691 @end ifset
692
693 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
694 @kindex -L @var{dir}
695 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
696 @item -L @var{searchdir}
697 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
698 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
700 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
703 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
704 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706 option is specified.
707
708 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
709 by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710 specified when the linker is configured.
711
712 @ifset UsesEnvVars
713 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
714 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
715 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716 @end ifset
717
718 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722 @cindex emulation
723 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
724 @item -m @var{emulation}
725 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732 configured.
733
734 @cindex link map
735 @kindex -M
736 @kindex --print-map
737 @item -M
738 @itemx --print-map
739 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740 information about the link, including the following:
741
742 @itemize @bullet
743 @item
744 Where object files are mapped into memory.
745 @item
746 How common symbols are allocated.
747 @item
748 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
750 @item
751 The values assigned to symbols.
752
753 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759 linker script containing:
760
761 @smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765 @end smallexample
766
767 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768 option is used:
769
770 @smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774 @end smallexample
775
776 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777 scripts.
778 @end itemize
779
780 @kindex -n
781 @cindex read-only text
782 @cindex NMAGIC
783 @kindex --nmagic
784 @item -n
785 @itemx --nmagic
786 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
789
790 @kindex -N
791 @kindex --omagic
792 @cindex read/write from cmd line
793 @cindex OMAGIC
794 @item -N
795 @itemx --omagic
796 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
797 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
799 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801 specification published by Microsoft.
802
803 @kindex --no-omagic
804 @cindex OMAGIC
805 @item --no-omagic
806 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
810
811 @kindex -o @var{output}
812 @kindex --output=@var{output}
813 @cindex naming the output file
814 @item -o @var{output}
815 @itemx --output=@var{output}
816 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
817 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820 @kindex -O @var{level}
821 @cindex generating optimized output
822 @item -O @var{level}
823 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
824 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
825 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
830
831 @kindex --push-state
832 @cindex push state governing input file handling
833 @item --push-state
834 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848 something as follows:
849
850 @smallexample
851 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852 @end smallexample
853
854 @kindex --pop-state
855 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
856 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857 flags governing input file handling.
858
859 @kindex -q
860 @kindex --emit-relocs
861 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
862 @item -q
863 @itemx --emit-relocs
864 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
865 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867 in larger executables.
868
869 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
871 @kindex --force-dynamic
872 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873 @item --force-dynamic
874 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875 to VxWorks targets.
876
877 @cindex partial link
878 @cindex relocatable output
879 @kindex -r
880 @kindex --relocatable
881 @item -r
882 @itemx --relocatable
883 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
884 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
885 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887 @code{OMAGIC}.
888 @c ; see @option{-N}.
889 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
893 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897 with input files in other formats at all.
898
899 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901 @kindex -R @var{file}
902 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903 @cindex symbol-only input
904 @item -R @var{filename}
905 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909 programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
911 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
912 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
913 the @option{-rpath} option.
914
915 @kindex -s
916 @kindex --strip-all
917 @cindex strip all symbols
918 @item -s
919 @itemx --strip-all
920 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922 @kindex -S
923 @kindex --strip-debug
924 @cindex strip debugger symbols
925 @item -S
926 @itemx --strip-debug
927 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929 @kindex -t
930 @kindex --trace
931 @cindex input files, displaying
932 @item -t
933 @itemx --trace
934 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
935
936 @kindex -T @var{script}
937 @kindex --script=@var{script}
938 @cindex script files
939 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
940 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
942 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
943 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
944 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947 options accumulate.
948
949 @kindex -dT @var{script}
950 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951 @cindex script files
952 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963 @samp{gcc}).
964
965 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
966 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967 @cindex undefined symbol
968 @item -u @var{symbol}
969 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
976 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979 instead.
980
981 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982 @cindex symbols, require defined
983 @cindex defined symbol
984 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
992 @kindex -Ur
993 @cindex constructors
994 @item -Ur
995 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
997 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
998 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002 @samp{-r} for the others.
1003
1004 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005 @cindex orphan sections
1006 @cindex sections, orphan
1007 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013 @table @code
1014 @item place
1015 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017 @samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019 @item discard
1020 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023 @item warn
1024 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025 issue a warning.
1026
1027 @item error
1028 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029 @end table
1030
1031 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
1033 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041 in a linker script.
1042
1043 @kindex -v
1044 @kindex -V
1045 @kindex --version
1046 @cindex version
1047 @item -v
1048 @itemx --version
1049 @itemx -V
1050 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1051 lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053 @kindex -x
1054 @kindex --discard-all
1055 @cindex deleting local symbols
1056 @item -x
1057 @itemx --discard-all
1058 Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060 @kindex -X
1061 @kindex --discard-locals
1062 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1063 @item -X
1064 @itemx --discard-locals
1065 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1068
1069 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071 @cindex symbol tracing
1072 @item -y @var{symbol}
1073 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076 to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1082 @item -Y @var{path}
1083 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084 for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087 @item -z @var{keyword}
1088 The recognized keywords are:
1089 @table @samp
1090
1091 @item combreloc
1092 Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093 lookup caching possible.
1094
1095 @item defs
1096 Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
1097 shared libraries are still allowed.
1098
1099 @item execstack
1100 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1101
1102 @item global
1103 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1104 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1105 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1106
1107 @item initfirst
1108 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1109 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1110 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1111 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1112 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1113 objects.
1114
1115 @item interpose
1116 Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1117 but the primary executable.
1118
1119 @item lazy
1120 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1121 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1122 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1123 Lazy binding is the default.
1124
1125 @item loadfltr
1126 Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1127 runtime.
1128
1129 @item muldefs
1130 Allows multiple definitions.
1131
1132 @item nocombreloc
1133 Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1134
1135 @item nocopyreloc
1136 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1137 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1138
1139 @item nodefaultlib
1140 Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1141 ignore any default library search paths.
1142
1143 @item nodelete
1144 Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1145
1146 @item nodlopen
1147 Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1148
1149 @item nodump
1150 Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1151
1152 @item noexecstack
1153 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1154
1155 @item text
1156 Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1157
1158 @item notext
1159 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1160
1161 @item textoff
1162 Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1163
1164 @item norelro
1165 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1166
1167 @item now
1168 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1169 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1170 when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1171 deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1172 first called.
1173
1174 @item origin
1175 Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1176
1177 @item relro
1178 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1179
1180 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1181 Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1182
1183 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1184 Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1185
1186 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1187 Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1188 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1189 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1190
1191 @item bndplt
1192 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1193
1194 @item noextern-protected-data
1195 Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1196 library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1197 to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1198 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1199 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1200 i386 and x86-64.
1201
1202 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1203 @itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1204 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1205 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1206 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1207 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1208 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1209 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1210 @option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1211 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1212 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1213 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1214 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1215
1216 @end table
1217
1218 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1219
1220 @kindex -(
1221 @cindex groups of archives
1222 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1223 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1224 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1225 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1226
1227 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1228 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1229 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1230 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1231 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1232 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1233 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1234 resolved.
1235
1236 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1237 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1238 more archives.
1239
1240 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1241 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1242 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1243 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1244 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1245 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1246 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1247 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1248 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1249 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1250 restore the old behaviour.
1251
1252 @kindex --as-needed
1253 @kindex --no-as-needed
1254 @item --as-needed
1255 @itemx --no-as-needed
1256 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1257 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1258 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1259 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1260 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1261 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1262 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1263 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1264 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1265 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1266 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1267 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1268 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1269
1270 @kindex --add-needed
1271 @kindex --no-add-needed
1272 @item --add-needed
1273 @itemx --no-add-needed
1274 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1275 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1276 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1277 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1278
1279 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1280 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1281 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1282
1283 @kindex -Bdynamic
1284 @kindex -dy
1285 @kindex -call_shared
1286 @item -Bdynamic
1287 @itemx -dy
1288 @itemx -call_shared
1289 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1290 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1291 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1292 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1293 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1294 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1295
1296 @kindex -Bgroup
1297 @item -Bgroup
1298 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1299 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1300 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1301 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1302 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1303
1304 @kindex -Bstatic
1305 @kindex -dn
1306 @kindex -non_shared
1307 @kindex -static
1308 @item -Bstatic
1309 @itemx -dn
1310 @itemx -non_shared
1311 @itemx -static
1312 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1313 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1314 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1315 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1316 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1317 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1318 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1319 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1320 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1321 libraries.
1322
1323 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1324 @item -Bsymbolic
1325 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1326 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1327 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1328 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1329 platforms which support shared libraries.
1330
1331 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1332 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1333 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1334 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1335 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1336 libraries.
1337
1338 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1339 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1340 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1341 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1342 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1343 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1344 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1345 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1346 which support shared libraries.
1347
1348 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1349 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1350
1351 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1352 @item --dynamic-list-data
1353 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1354
1355 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1356 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1357 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1358 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1359
1360 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1361 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1362 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1363
1364 @kindex --check-sections
1365 @kindex --no-check-sections
1366 @item --check-sections
1367 @itemx --no-check-sections
1368 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1369 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1370 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1371 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1372 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1373 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1374 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1375 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1376 option.
1377
1378 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1379 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1380 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1381 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1382 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1383 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1384 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1385 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1386 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1387 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1388 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1389 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1390
1391 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1392 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1393 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1394 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1395 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1396 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1397 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1398 symbols.
1399
1400 @cindex cross reference table
1401 @kindex --cref
1402 @item --cref
1403 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1404 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1405 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1406
1407 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1408 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1409 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1410 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1411 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1412 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1413 symbol are listed.
1414
1415 @cindex common allocation
1416 @kindex --no-define-common
1417 @item --no-define-common
1418 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1419 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1420 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1421
1422 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1423 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1424 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1425 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1426 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1427 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1428 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1429 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1430 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1431 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1432
1433 @cindex symbols, from command line
1434 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1435 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1436 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1437 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1438 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1439 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1440 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1441 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1442 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1443 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1444 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1445 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1446
1447 @cindex demangling, from command line
1448 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1449 @kindex --no-demangle
1450 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1451 @itemx --no-demangle
1452 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1453 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1454 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1455 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1456 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1457 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1458 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1459 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1460 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1461
1462 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1463 @kindex -I@var{file}
1464 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1465 @item -I@var{file}
1466 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1467 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1468 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1469 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1470 doing.
1471
1472 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1473 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1474 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1475 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1476 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1477 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1478
1479 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1480 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1481 @item --fatal-warnings
1482 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1483 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1484 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1485
1486 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1487 @item --force-exe-suffix
1488 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1489
1490 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1491 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1492 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1493 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1494 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1495 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1496
1497 @kindex --gc-sections
1498 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1499 @cindex garbage collection
1500 @item --gc-sections
1501 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1502 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1503 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1504 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1505 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1506 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1507 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1508
1509 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1510 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1511 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1512 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1513 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1514 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1515 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1516 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1517 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1518
1519 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1520 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1521 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1522 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1523
1524 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1525 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1526 @cindex garbage collection
1527 @item --print-gc-sections
1528 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1529 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1530 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1531 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1532 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1533 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1534 line.
1535
1536 @kindex --print-output-format
1537 @cindex output format
1538 @item --print-output-format
1539 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1540 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1541 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1542
1543 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1544 @cindex memory usage
1545 @item --print-memory-usage
1546 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1547 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1548 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1549 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1550 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1551
1552 @smallexample
1553 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1554 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1555 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1556 @end smallexample
1557
1558 @cindex help
1559 @cindex usage
1560 @kindex --help
1561 @item --help
1562 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1563
1564 @kindex --target-help
1565 @item --target-help
1566 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1567
1568 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1569 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1570 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1571 @option{-M} option, above.
1572
1573 @cindex memory usage
1574 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1575 @item --no-keep-memory
1576 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1577 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1578 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1579 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1580 while linking a large executable.
1581
1582 @kindex --no-undefined
1583 @kindex -z defs
1584 @item --no-undefined
1585 @itemx -z defs
1586 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1587 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1588 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1589 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1590 libraries being linked in.
1591
1592 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1593 @kindex -z muldefs
1594 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1595 @itemx -z muldefs
1596 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1597 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1598 first definition will be used.
1599
1600 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1601 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1602 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1603 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1604 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1605 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1606 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1607 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1608 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1609
1610 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1611 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1612 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1613 a shared library.
1614
1615 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1616 libraries specified at link time are that:
1617
1618 @itemize @bullet
1619 @item
1620 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1621 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1622 resolvable at load time.
1623 @item
1624 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1625 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1626
1627 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1628 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1629 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1630 appropriate memset function.
1631 @end itemize
1632
1633 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1634 @item --no-undefined-version
1635 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1636 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1637 will be issued instead.
1638
1639 @kindex --default-symver
1640 @item --default-symver
1641 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1642 exported symbols.
1643
1644 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1645 @item --default-imported-symver
1646 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1647 imported symbols.
1648
1649 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1650 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1651 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1652 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1653 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1654 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1655 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1656 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1657 inappropriate.
1658
1659 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1660 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1661 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1662 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1663
1664 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1665 @item --no-whole-archive
1666 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1667 archive files.
1668
1669 @cindex output file after errors
1670 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1671 @item --noinhibit-exec
1672 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1673 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1674 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1675 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1676
1677 @kindex -nostdlib
1678 @item -nostdlib
1679 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1680 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1681 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1682
1683 @ifclear SingleFormat
1684 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1685 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1686 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1687 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1688 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1689 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1690 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1691 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1692 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1693 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1694 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1695 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1696 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1697 @end ifclear
1698
1699 @kindex -pie
1700 @kindex --pic-executable
1701 @item -pie
1702 @itemx --pic-executable
1703 @cindex position independent executables
1704 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1705 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1706 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1707 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1708 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1709 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1710
1711 @kindex -qmagic
1712 @item -qmagic
1713 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1714
1715 @kindex -Qy
1716 @item -Qy
1717 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1718
1719 @kindex --relax
1720 @cindex synthesizing linker
1721 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1722 @cindex --no-relax
1723 @item --relax
1724 @itemx --no-relax
1725 An option with machine dependent effects.
1726 @ifset GENERIC
1727 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1728 @end ifset
1729 @ifset H8300
1730 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1731 @end ifset
1732 @ifset I960
1733 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1734 @end ifset
1735 @ifset XTENSA
1736 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1737 @end ifset
1738 @ifset M68HC11
1739 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1740 @end ifset
1741 @ifset NIOSII
1742 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1743 @end ifset
1744 @ifset POWERPC
1745 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1746 @end ifset
1747
1748 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1749 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1750 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1751 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1752 instructions, and combining constant values.
1753
1754 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1755 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1756 @ifset GENERIC
1757 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1758 family of processors.
1759 @end ifset
1760
1761 @ifset GENERIC
1762 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1763 but ignored.
1764 @end ifset
1765
1766 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1767 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1768
1769 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1770 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1771 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1772 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1773 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1774 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1775 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1776 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1777 @ifset GENERIC
1778 (such as VxWorks)
1779 @end ifset
1780 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1781 run-time memory.
1782
1783 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1784 or symbols needed for relocations.
1785
1786 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1787 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1788
1789 @ifset GENERIC
1790 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1791 @cindex runtime library search path
1792 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1793 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1794 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1795 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1796 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1797 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1798 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1799 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1800 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1801 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1802
1803 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1804 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1805 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1806 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1807 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1808 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1809 file systems.
1810
1811 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1812 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1813 the @option{-rpath} option.
1814 @end ifset
1815
1816 @ifset GENERIC
1817 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1818 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1819 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1820 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1821 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1822 of the input files.
1823
1824 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1825 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1826 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1827 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1828 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1829 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1830 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1831 appearing multiple times.
1832
1833 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1834 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1835 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1836 runtime linker would do.
1837
1838 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1839 libraries:
1840 @enumerate
1841 @item
1842 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1843 @item
1844 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1845 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1846 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1847 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1848 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1849 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1850 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1851 @item
1852 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1853 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1854 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1855 @item
1856 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1857 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1858 @item
1859 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
1860 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
1861 @item
1862 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1863 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1864 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1865 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1866 @item
1867 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1868 @item
1869 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1870 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1871 @end enumerate
1872
1873 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1874 warning and continue with the link.
1875 @end ifset
1876
1877 @kindex -shared
1878 @kindex -Bshareable
1879 @item -shared
1880 @itemx -Bshareable
1881 @cindex shared libraries
1882 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1883 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
1884 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
1885 undefined symbols in the link.
1886
1887 @kindex --sort-common
1888 @item --sort-common
1889 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
1890 @itemx --sort-common=descending
1891 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1892 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1893 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1894 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1895 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1896 specified, then descending order is assumed.
1897
1898 @kindex --sort-section=name
1899 @item --sort-section=name
1900 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1901 patterns in the linker script.
1902
1903 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
1904 @item --sort-section=alignment
1905 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1906 patterns in the linker script.
1907
1908 @kindex --split-by-file
1909 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
1910 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
1911 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1912 size of 1 if not given.
1913
1914 @kindex --split-by-reloc
1915 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
1916 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
1917 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
1918 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
1919 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1920 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1921 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1922 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1923 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1924 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
1925 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
1926
1927 @kindex --stats
1928 @item --stats
1929 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1930 as execution time and memory usage.
1931
1932 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
1933 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1934 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1935 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1936 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1937
1938 @kindex --traditional-format
1939 @cindex traditional format
1940 @item --traditional-format
1941 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1942 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
1943 use the traditional format instead.
1944
1945 @cindex dbx
1946 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
1947 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1948 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1949 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
1950 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
1951 combine duplicate entries.
1952
1953 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1954 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1955 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1956 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1957 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1958 line.
1959 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1960 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1961 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1962 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1963 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1964
1965 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1966 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1967 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
1968 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
1969 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
1970 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1971 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1972 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1973 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
1974
1975 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1976 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1977 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1978 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1979 byte of the text segment.
1980
1981 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1982 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1983 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1984 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1985 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1986 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1987
1988 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1989 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1990 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1991 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1992 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1993
1994 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
1995 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1996 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1997 values for @samp{method}:
1998
1999 @table @samp
2000 @item ignore-all
2001 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2002
2003 @item report-all
2004 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2005
2006 @item ignore-in-object-files
2007 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2008 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2009
2010 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2011 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2012 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2013 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2014 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2015 command line.
2016 @end table
2017
2018 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2019 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2020
2021 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2022 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2023 can change this to a warning.
2024
2025 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2026 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2027 @item --dll-verbose
2028 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2029 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2030 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2031 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2032 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2033
2034 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2035 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2036 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2037 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2038 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2039 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2040 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2041 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2042 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2043 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2044 @xref{WIN32}.
2045
2046 @kindex --warn-common
2047 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2048 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2049 @item --warn-common
2050 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2051 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2052 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2053 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2054 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2055 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2056
2057 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2058
2059 @table @samp
2060 @item int i = 1;
2061 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2062 file.
2063
2064 @item extern int i;
2065 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2066 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2067 variable somewhere.
2068
2069 @item int i;
2070 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2071 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2072 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2073 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2074 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2075 a definition of the same variable.
2076 @end table
2077
2078 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2079 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2080 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2081 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2082 a common symbol.
2083
2084 @enumerate
2085 @item
2086 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2087 definition for the symbol.
2088 @smallexample
2089 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2090 overridden by definition
2091 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2092 @end smallexample
2093
2094 @item
2095 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2096 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2097 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2098 @smallexample
2099 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2100 overriding common
2101 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2102 @end smallexample
2103
2104 @item
2105 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2106 @smallexample
2107 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2108 of `@var{symbol}'
2109 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2110 @end smallexample
2111
2112 @item
2113 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2114 @smallexample
2115 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2116 overridden by larger common
2117 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2118 @end smallexample
2119
2120 @item
2121 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2122 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2123 encountered in a different order.
2124 @smallexample
2125 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2126 overriding smaller common
2127 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2128 @end smallexample
2129 @end enumerate
2130
2131 @kindex --warn-constructors
2132 @item --warn-constructors
2133 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2134 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2135 detect the use of global constructors.
2136
2137 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2138 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2139 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2140 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2141 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2142 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2143 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2144 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2145 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2146 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2147 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2148 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2149 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2150
2151 @kindex --warn-once
2152 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2153 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2154 @item --warn-once
2155 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2156 which refers to it.
2157
2158 @kindex --warn-section-align
2159 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2160 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2161 @item --warn-section-align
2162 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2163 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2164 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2165 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2166 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2167
2168 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2169 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2170 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2171
2172 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2173 @item --warn-alternate-em
2174 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2175
2176 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2177 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2178 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2179 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2180 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2181
2182 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2183 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2184 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2185 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2186
2187 @kindex --whole-archive
2188 @cindex including an entire archive
2189 @item --whole-archive
2190 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2191 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2192 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2193 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2194 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2195 library. This option may be used more than once.
2196
2197 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2198 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2199 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2200 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2201 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2202
2203 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2204 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2205 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2206 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2207 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2208 @var{symbol}.
2209
2210 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2211 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2212 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2213 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2214
2215 Here is a trivial example:
2216
2217 @smallexample
2218 void *
2219 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2220 @{
2221 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2222 return __real_malloc (c);
2223 @}
2224 @end smallexample
2225
2226 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2227 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2228 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2229 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2230
2231 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2232 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2233 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2234 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2235 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2236
2237 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2238 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2239 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2240 @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2241
2242 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2243 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2244 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2245 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2246 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2247
2248 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2249 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2250 @item --enable-new-dtags
2251 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2252 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2253 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2254 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2255 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2256 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2257 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2258 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2259
2260 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2261 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2262 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2263 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2264 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2265 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2266 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2267
2268 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2269 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2270 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2271 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2272 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2273 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2274 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2275
2276 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2277 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2278 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2279 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2280 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2281 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2282 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2283 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2284 On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2285 compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
2286 compress DWARF debug sections.
2287 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
2288 sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2289 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2290 and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2291 compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
2292 The default behaviour varies depending upon the target involved and
2293 the configure options used to build the toolchain. The default can be
2294 determined by examing the output from the linker's @option{--help} option.
2295
2296 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2297 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2298 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2299 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2300 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2301 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2302
2303 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2304 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2305 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2306 has been used.
2307
2308 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2309 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2310
2311 @kindex --build-id
2312 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2313 @item --build-id
2314 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2315 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2316 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2317 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2318 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2319 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2320 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2321 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2322 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2323 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2324 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2325
2326 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2327 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2328 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2329 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2330 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2331 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2332
2333 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2334 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2335 @end table
2336
2337 @c man end
2338
2339 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2340
2341 @c man begin OPTIONS
2342
2343 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2344 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2345 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2346 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2347 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2348 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2349 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2350 object file).
2351
2352 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2353 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2354 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2355 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2356
2357 @table @gcctabopt
2358
2359 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2360 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2361 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2362 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2363 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2364
2365 @kindex --base-file
2366 @item --base-file @var{file}
2367 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2368 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2369 @file{dlltool}.
2370 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2371
2372 @kindex --dll
2373 @item --dll
2374 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2375 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2376 file.
2377 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2378
2379 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2380 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2381 @item --enable-long-section-names
2382 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2383 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2384 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2385 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2386 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2387 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2388 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2389 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2390 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2391 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2392 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2393 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2394 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2395 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2396 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2397 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2398 image and not stripping symbols.
2399 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2400
2401 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2402 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2403 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2404 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2405 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2406 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2407 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2408 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2409 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2410 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2411 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2412 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2413 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2414 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2415 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2416 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2417 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2418 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2419
2420 @kindex --leading-underscore
2421 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2422 @item --leading-underscore
2423 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2424 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2425 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2426 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2427
2428 @cindex DLLs, creating
2429 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2430 @item --export-all-symbols
2431 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2432 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2433 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2434 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2435 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2436 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2437 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2438 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2439 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2440 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2441 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2442 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2443 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2444 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2445 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2446 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2447 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2448 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2449 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2450 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2451 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2452 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2453 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2454
2455 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2456 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2457 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2458 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2459 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2460
2461 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2462 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2463 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2464 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2465
2466 @kindex --file-alignment
2467 @item --file-alignment
2468 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2469 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2470 512.
2471 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2472
2473 @cindex heap size
2474 @kindex --heap
2475 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2476 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2477 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2478 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2479 committed.
2480 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2481
2482 @cindex image base
2483 @kindex --image-base
2484 @item --image-base @var{value}
2485 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2486 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2487 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2488 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2489 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2490 for dlls.
2491 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2492
2493 @kindex --kill-at
2494 @item --kill-at
2495 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2496 symbols before they are exported.
2497 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2498
2499 @kindex --large-address-aware
2500 @item --large-address-aware
2501 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2502 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2503 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2504 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2505 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2506 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2507
2508 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2509 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2510 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2511 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2512 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2513 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2514 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2515
2516 @kindex --major-image-version
2517 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2518 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2519 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2520
2521 @kindex --major-os-version
2522 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2523 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2524 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2525
2526 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2527 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2528 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2529 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2530
2531 @kindex --minor-image-version
2532 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2533 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2534 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2535
2536 @kindex --minor-os-version
2537 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2538 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2539 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2540
2541 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2542 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2543 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2544 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2545
2546 @cindex DEF files, creating
2547 @cindex DLLs, creating
2548 @kindex --output-def
2549 @item --output-def @var{file}
2550 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2551 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2552 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2553 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2554 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2555 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2556
2557 @cindex DLLs, creating
2558 @kindex --out-implib
2559 @item --out-implib @var{file}
2560 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2561 import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2562 import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
2563 may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
2564 makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2565 creation step.
2566 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2567
2568 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2569 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2570 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2571 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2572 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2573 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2574 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2575 execution are avoided.
2576 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2577
2578 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2579 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2580 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2581 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2582 default.
2583 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2584
2585 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2586 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2587 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2588 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2589 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2590 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2591 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2592 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2593 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2594 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2595
2596 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2597 @item --enable-auto-import
2598 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2599 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2600 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2601 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2602 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2603 specification published by Microsoft.
2604
2605 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2606 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2607 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2608 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2609 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2610
2611 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2612 see this message:
2613
2614 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2615 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2616
2617 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2618 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2619 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2620 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2621 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2622 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2623 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2624 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2625 the warning, and exit.
2626
2627 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2628 data type of the exported variable:
2629
2630 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2631 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2632 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2633
2634 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2635 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2636 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2637 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2638
2639 @example
2640 extern type extern_array[];
2641 extern_array[1] -->
2642 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2643 @end example
2644
2645 or
2646
2647 @example
2648 extern type extern_array[];
2649 extern_array[1] -->
2650 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2651 @end example
2652
2653 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2654 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2655
2656 @example
2657 extern struct s extern_struct;
2658 extern_struct.field -->
2659 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2660 @end example
2661
2662 or
2663
2664 @example
2665 extern long long extern_ll;
2666 extern_ll -->
2667 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2668 @end example
2669
2670 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2671 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2672 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2673 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2674 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2675 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2676 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2677 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2678
2679 Original:
2680 @example
2681 --foo.h
2682 extern int arr[];
2683 --foo.c
2684 #include "foo.h"
2685 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2686 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2687 @}
2688 @end example
2689
2690 Solution 1:
2691 @example
2692 --foo.h
2693 extern int arr[];
2694 --foo.c
2695 #include "foo.h"
2696 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2697 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2698 volatile int *parr = arr;
2699 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2700 @}
2701 @end example
2702
2703 Solution 2:
2704 @example
2705 --foo.h
2706 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2707 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2708 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2709 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2710 #else
2711 #define FOO_IMPORT
2712 #endif
2713 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2714 --foo.c
2715 #include "foo.h"
2716 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2717 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2718 @}
2719 @end example
2720
2721 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2722 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2723 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2724 functions).
2725 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2726
2727 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2728 @item --disable-auto-import
2729 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2730 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2731 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2732
2733 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2734 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2735 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2736 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2737 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2738 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2739 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2740
2741 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2742 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2743 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2744 DLLs.
2745 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2746
2747 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2748 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2749 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2750 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2751
2752 @kindex --section-alignment
2753 @item --section-alignment
2754 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2755 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2756 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2757
2758 @cindex stack size
2759 @kindex --stack
2760 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2761 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2762 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2763 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2764 committed.
2765 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2766
2767 @kindex --subsystem
2768 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2769 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2770 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2771 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2772 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2773 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2774 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2775 @var{which}.
2776 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2777
2778 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2779 of the PE file header:
2780 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2781
2782 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2783 @item --high-entropy-va
2784 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2785 (ASLR).
2786
2787 @kindex --dynamicbase
2788 @item --dynamicbase
2789 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2790 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2791 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2792
2793 @kindex --forceinteg
2794 @item --forceinteg
2795 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2796
2797 @kindex --nxcompat
2798 @item --nxcompat
2799 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2800 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2801
2802 @kindex --no-isolation
2803 @item --no-isolation
2804 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2805
2806 @kindex --no-seh
2807 @item --no-seh
2808 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2809 this image.
2810
2811 @kindex --no-bind
2812 @item --no-bind
2813 Do not bind this image.
2814
2815 @kindex --wdmdriver
2816 @item --wdmdriver
2817 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2818
2819 @kindex --tsaware
2820 @item --tsaware
2821 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2822
2823 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2824 @item --insert-timestamp
2825 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2826 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2827 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2828 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2829 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2830 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2831 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2832 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2833 identically.
2834 @end table
2835
2836 @c man end
2837
2838 @ifset C6X
2839 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2840
2841 @c man begin OPTIONS
2842
2843 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2844 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2845 all executables use an index of 0.
2846
2847 @table @gcctabopt
2848
2849 @kindex --dsbt-size
2850 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2851 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
2852 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2853 entries.
2854
2855 @kindex --dsbt-index
2856 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2857 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2858 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2859 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2860 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2861
2862 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2863 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2864 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2865
2866 @end table
2867
2868 @c man end
2869 @end ifset
2870
2871 @ifset M68HC11
2872 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2873
2874 @c man begin OPTIONS
2875
2876 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2877 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2878
2879 @table @gcctabopt
2880
2881 @kindex --no-trampoline
2882 @item --no-trampoline
2883 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2884 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2885 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2886
2887 @kindex --bank-window
2888 @item --bank-window @var{name}
2889 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2890 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2891 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2892 paging and addresses within the memory window.
2893
2894 @end table
2895
2896 @c man end
2897 @end ifset
2898
2899 @ifset M68K
2900 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2901
2902 @c man begin OPTIONS
2903
2904 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2905 when linking for 68K targets.
2906
2907 @table @gcctabopt
2908
2909 @kindex --got
2910 @item --got=@var{type}
2911 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2912 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2913 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2914 Info entry for @file{ld}.
2915
2916 @end table
2917
2918 @c man end
2919 @end ifset
2920
2921 @ifset MIPS
2922 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2923
2924 @c man begin OPTIONS
2925
2926 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2927 generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2928
2929 @table @gcctabopt
2930
2931 @kindex --insn32
2932 @item --insn32
2933 @kindex --no-insn32
2934 @itemx --no-insn32
2935 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2936 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2937 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
2938 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2939 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2940 possible.
2941
2942 @end table
2943
2944 @c man end
2945 @end ifset
2946
2947 @ifset UsesEnvVars
2948 @node Environment
2949 @section Environment Variables
2950
2951 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2952
2953 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
2954 @ifclear SingleFormat
2955 @code{GNUTARGET},
2956 @end ifclear
2957 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
2958
2959 @ifclear SingleFormat
2960 @kindex GNUTARGET
2961 @cindex default input format
2962 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2963 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2964 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
2965 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
2966 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2967 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2968 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2969 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2970 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2971 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2972 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2973 @end ifclear
2974
2975 @kindex LDEMULATION
2976 @cindex default emulation
2977 @cindex emulation, default
2978 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2979 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2980 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2981 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2982 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2983 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2984 linker was configured.
2985
2986 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2987 @cindex demangling, default
2988 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2989 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2990 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2991 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2992 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2993 options.
2994
2995 @c man end
2996 @end ifset
2997
2998 @node Scripts
2999 @chapter Linker Scripts
3000
3001 @cindex scripts
3002 @cindex linker scripts
3003 @cindex command files
3004 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3005 written in the linker command language.
3006
3007 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3008 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3009 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3010 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3011 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3012 described below.
3013
3014 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3015 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3016 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3017 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3018 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3019
3020 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3021 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3022 default linker script.
3023
3024 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3025 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3026 Linker Scripts}.
3027
3028 @menu
3029 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3030 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3031 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3032 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3033 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3034 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3035 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3036 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3037 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3038 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3039 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3040 @end menu
3041
3042 @node Basic Script Concepts
3043 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3044 @cindex linker script concepts
3045 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3046 describe the linker script language.
3047
3048 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3049 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3050 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3051 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3052 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3053 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3054 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3055 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3056
3057 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3058 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3059 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3060 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3061 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3062 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3063 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3064 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3065 of debugging information.
3066
3067 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3068 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3069 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3070 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3071 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3072 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3073 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3074 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3075 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3076 RAM address would be the VMA.
3077
3078 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3079 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3080
3081 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3082 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3083 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3084 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3085 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3086 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3087 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3088
3089 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3090 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3091 option.
3092
3093 @node Script Format
3094 @section Linker Script Format
3095 @cindex linker script format
3096 Linker scripts are text files.
3097
3098 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3099 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3100 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3101 generally ignored.
3102
3103 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3104 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3105 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3106 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3107 file name.
3108
3109 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3110 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3111 to whitespace.
3112
3113 @node Simple Example
3114 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3115 @cindex linker script example
3116 @cindex example of linker script
3117 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3118
3119 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3120 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3121 memory layout of the output file.
3122
3123 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3124 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3125 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3126 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3127 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3128 your input files.
3129
3130 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3131 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3132 linker script which will do that:
3133 @smallexample
3134 SECTIONS
3135 @{
3136 . = 0x10000;
3137 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3138 . = 0x8000000;
3139 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3140 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3141 @}
3142 @end smallexample
3143
3144 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3145 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3146 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3147
3148 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3149 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3150 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3151 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3152 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3153 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3154 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3155
3156 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3157 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3158 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3159 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3160 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3161 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3162
3163 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3164 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3165 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3166
3167 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3168 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3169 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3170 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3171 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3172 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3173 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3174
3175 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3176 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3177 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3178 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3179 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3180 sections.
3181
3182 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3183
3184 @node Simple Commands
3185 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3186 @cindex linker script simple commands
3187 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3188
3189 @menu
3190 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3191 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3192 @ifclear SingleFormat
3193 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3194 @end ifclear
3195
3196 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3197 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3198 @end menu
3199
3200 @node Entry Point
3201 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3202 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3203 @cindex start of execution
3204 @cindex first instruction
3205 @cindex entry point
3206 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3207 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3208 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3209 @smallexample
3210 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3211 @end smallexample
3212
3213 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3214 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3215 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3216 @itemize @bullet
3217 @item
3218 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3219 @item
3220 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3221 @item
3222 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3223 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3224 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3225 @item
3226 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3227 @item
3228 The address @code{0}.
3229 @end itemize
3230
3231 @node File Commands
3232 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3233 @cindex linker script file commands
3234 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3235
3236 @table @code
3237 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3238 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3239 @cindex including a linker script
3240 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3241 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3242 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3243 10 levels deep.
3244
3245 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3246 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3247
3248 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3249 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3250 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3251 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3252 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3253 @cindex linker script input object files
3254 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3255 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3256
3257 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3258 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3259 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3260
3261 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3262 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3263
3264 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3265 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3266 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3267 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3268 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3269 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3270 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3271 as the first character in the filename path. See also the
3272 description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3273
3274 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3275 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3276 @samp{-l}.
3277
3278 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3279 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3280 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3281
3282 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3283 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3284 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3285 @cindex grouping input files
3286 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3287 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3288 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3289 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3290
3291 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3292 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3293 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3294 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3295 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3296 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3297 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3298 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3299 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3300 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3301 setting afterwards.
3302
3303 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3304 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3305 @cindex output file name in linker script
3306 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3307 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3308 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3309 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3310 precedence.
3311
3312 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3313 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3314
3315 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3316 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3317 @cindex library search path in linker script
3318 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3319 @cindex search path in linker script
3320 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3321 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3322 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3323 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3324 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3325 the command line option are searched first.
3326
3327 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3328 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3329 @cindex first input file
3330 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3331 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3332 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3333 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3334 first file.
3335 @end table
3336
3337 @ifclear SingleFormat
3338 @node Format Commands
3339 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3340 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3341
3342 @table @code
3343 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3344 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3345 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3346 @cindex output file format in linker script
3347 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3348 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3349 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3350 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3351 line option takes precedence.
3352
3353 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3354 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3355 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3356 desired endianness.
3357
3358 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3359 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3360 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3361 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3362
3363 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3364 command:
3365 @smallexample
3366 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3367 @end smallexample
3368 This says that the default format for the output file is
3369 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3370 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3371 format.
3372
3373 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3374 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3375 @cindex input file format in linker script
3376 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3377 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3378 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3379 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3380 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3381 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3382 @end table
3383 @end ifclear
3384
3385 @node REGION_ALIAS
3386 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3387 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3388 @cindex region alias
3389 @cindex region names
3390
3391 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3392 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3393
3394 @smallexample
3395 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3396 @end smallexample
3397
3398 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3399 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3400 to memory regions. An example follows.
3401
3402 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3403 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3404 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3405 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3406 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3407 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3408 sections:
3409
3410 @itemize @bullet
3411 @item
3412 @code{.text} program code;
3413 @item
3414 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3415 @item
3416 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3417 @item
3418 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3419 @end itemize
3420
3421 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3422 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3423 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3424 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3425 @code{C}:
3426 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3427 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3428 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3429 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3430 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3431 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3432 @end multitable
3433 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3434 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3435 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3436 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3437
3438 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3439 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3440 memory layout:
3441 @smallexample
3442 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3443
3444 SECTIONS
3445 @{
3446 .text :
3447 @{
3448 *(.text)
3449 @} > REGION_TEXT
3450 .rodata :
3451 @{
3452 *(.rodata)
3453 rodata_end = .;
3454 @} > REGION_RODATA
3455 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3456 @{
3457 data_start = .;
3458 *(.data)
3459 @} > REGION_DATA
3460 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3461 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3462 .bss :
3463 @{
3464 *(.bss)
3465 @} > REGION_BSS
3466 @}
3467 @end smallexample
3468
3469 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3470 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3471 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3472 @table @code
3473 @item A
3474 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3475 @smallexample
3476 MEMORY
3477 @{
3478 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3479 @}
3480
3481 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3482 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3483 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3484 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3485 @end smallexample
3486 @item B
3487 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3488 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3489 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3490 @smallexample
3491 MEMORY
3492 @{
3493 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3494 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3495 @}
3496
3497 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3498 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3499 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3500 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3501 @end smallexample
3502 @item C
3503 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3504 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3505 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3506 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3507 @smallexample
3508 MEMORY
3509 @{
3510 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3511 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3512 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3513 @}
3514
3515 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3516 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3517 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3518 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3519 @end smallexample
3520 @end table
3521
3522 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3523 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3524 necessary:
3525 @smallexample
3526 #include <string.h>
3527
3528 extern char data_start [];
3529 extern char data_size [];
3530 extern char data_load_start [];
3531
3532 void copy_data(void)
3533 @{
3534 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3535 @{
3536 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3537 @}
3538 @}
3539 @end smallexample
3540
3541 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3542 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3543 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3544
3545 @table @code
3546 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3547 @kindex ASSERT
3548 @cindex assertion in linker script
3549 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3550 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3551
3552 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3553 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3554 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3555 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3556 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3557
3558 @smallexample
3559 .stack :
3560 @{
3561 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3562 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3563 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3564 @}
3565 @end smallexample
3566
3567 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3568 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3569 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3570
3571 @smallexample
3572 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3573 .stack :
3574 @{
3575 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3576 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3577 @}
3578 @end smallexample
3579
3580 will work.
3581
3582 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3583 @kindex EXTERN
3584 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3585 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3586 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3587 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3588 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3589 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3590
3591 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3592 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3593 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3594 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3595 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3596 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3597
3598 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3599 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3600 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3601 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3602 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3603 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3604
3605 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3606 @kindex INSERT
3607 @cindex insert user script into default script
3608 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3609 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3610 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3611 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3612 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3613 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3614 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3615 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3616 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3617 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3618 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3619 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3620 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3621
3622 @smallexample
3623 SECTIONS
3624 @{
3625 OVERLAY :
3626 @{
3627 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3628 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3629 @}
3630 @}
3631 INSERT AFTER .text;
3632 @end smallexample
3633
3634 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3635 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3636 @cindex cross references
3637 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3638 references among certain output sections.
3639
3640 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3641 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3642 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3643 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3644 a function defined in the other section.
3645
3646 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3647 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3648 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3649 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3650 names.
3651
3652 @ifclear SingleFormat
3653 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3654 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3655 @cindex machine architecture
3656 @cindex architecture
3657 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3658 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3659 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3660 the @samp{-f} option.
3661 @end ifclear
3662
3663 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3664 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3665 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3666 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3667 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3668 @xref{Expression Section}.
3669 @end table
3670
3671 @node Assignments
3672 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3673 @cindex assignment in scripts
3674 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3675 @cindex variables, defining
3676 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3677 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3678
3679 @menu
3680 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3681 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3682 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3683 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3684 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3685 @end menu
3686
3687 @node Simple Assignments
3688 @subsection Simple Assignments
3689
3690 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3691
3692 @table @code
3693 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3694 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3695 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3696 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3697 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3698 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3699 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3700 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3701 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3702 @end table
3703
3704 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3705 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3706 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3707
3708 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3709 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3710
3711 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3712
3713 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3714
3715 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3716 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3717 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3718
3719 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3720 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3721
3722 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3723 assignments may be used:
3724
3725 @smallexample
3726 floating_point = 0;
3727 SECTIONS
3728 @{
3729 .text :
3730 @{
3731 *(.text)
3732 _etext = .;
3733 @}
3734 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3735 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3736 @}
3737 @end smallexample
3738 @noindent
3739 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3740 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3741 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3742 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3743 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3744
3745 @node HIDDEN
3746 @subsection HIDDEN
3747 @cindex HIDDEN
3748 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3749 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3750
3751 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3752 @code{HIDDEN}:
3753
3754 @smallexample
3755 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3756 SECTIONS
3757 @{
3758 .text :
3759 @{
3760 *(.text)
3761 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3762 @}
3763 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3764 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3765 @}
3766 @end smallexample
3767 @noindent
3768 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3769
3770 @node PROVIDE
3771 @subsection PROVIDE
3772 @cindex PROVIDE
3773 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3774 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3775 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3776 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3777 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3778 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3779 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3780 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3781
3782 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3783 @smallexample
3784 SECTIONS
3785 @{
3786 .text :
3787 @{
3788 *(.text)
3789 _etext = .;
3790 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3791 @}
3792 @}
3793 @end smallexample
3794
3795 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3796 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3797 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3798 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3799 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3800 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3801
3802 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3803 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3804 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3805 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3806 hidden and won't be exported.
3807
3808 @node Source Code Reference
3809 @subsection Source Code Reference
3810
3811 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3812 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3813 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3814 symbol that does not have a value.
3815
3816 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3817 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3818 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3819 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3820 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3821 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3822 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3823 linker script variable might be referred to as:
3824
3825 @smallexample
3826 extern int foo;
3827 @end smallexample
3828
3829 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3830
3831 @smallexample
3832 _foo = 1000;
3833 @end smallexample
3834
3835 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3836 transformation has taken place.
3837
3838 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3839 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3840 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3841 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3842 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3843 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3844 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3845
3846 @smallexample
3847 int foo = 1000;
3848 @end smallexample
3849
3850 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3851 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3852 number 1000 is initially stored.
3853
3854 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3855 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3856 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3857 So:
3858
3859 @smallexample
3860 foo = 1;
3861 @end smallexample
3862
3863 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3864 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3865 address. Whereas:
3866
3867 @smallexample
3868 int * a = & foo;
3869 @end smallexample
3870
3871 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
3872 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3873 the variable @samp{a}.
3874
3875 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3876 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3877 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3878
3879 @smallexample
3880 foo = 1000;
3881 @end smallexample
3882
3883 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3884 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3885 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3886 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3887 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3888
3889 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3890 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3891 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3892 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3893 linker script contains these declarations:
3894
3895 @smallexample
3896 @group
3897 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3898 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
3899 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3900 @end group
3901 @end smallexample
3902
3903 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3904
3905 @smallexample
3906 @group
3907 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
3908
3909 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3910 @end group
3911 @end smallexample
3912
3913 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3914 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3915 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3916
3917 @smallexample
3918 @group
3919 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3920
3921 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3922 @end group
3923 @end smallexample
3924
3925 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3926 operators.
3927
3928 @node SECTIONS
3929 @section SECTIONS Command
3930 @kindex SECTIONS
3931 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3932 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3933
3934 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3935 @smallexample
3936 SECTIONS
3937 @{
3938 @var{sections-command}
3939 @var{sections-command}
3940 @dots{}
3941 @}
3942 @end smallexample
3943
3944 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3945
3946 @itemize @bullet
3947 @item
3948 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3949 @item
3950 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3951 @item
3952 an output section description
3953 @item
3954 an overlay description
3955 @end itemize
3956
3957 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3958 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3959 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3960 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3961 the layout of the output file.
3962
3963 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3964 below.
3965
3966 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3967 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3968 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3969 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3970 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3971 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3972
3973 @menu
3974 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
3975 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
3976 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
3977 * Input Section:: Input section description
3978 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
3979 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3980 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3981 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3982 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3983 @end menu
3984
3985 @node Output Section Description
3986 @subsection Output Section Description
3987 The full description of an output section looks like this:
3988 @smallexample
3989 @group
3990 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
3991 [AT(@var{lma})]
3992 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
3993 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3994 [@var{constraint}]
3995 @{
3996 @var{output-section-command}
3997 @var{output-section-command}
3998 @dots{}
3999 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4000 @end group
4001 @end smallexample
4002
4003 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4004
4005 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4006 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4007 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4008 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4009 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4010
4011 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4012
4013 @itemize @bullet
4014 @item
4015 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4016 @item
4017 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4018 @item
4019 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4020 @item
4021 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4022 @end itemize
4023
4024 @node Output Section Name
4025 @subsection Output Section Name
4026 @cindex name, section
4027 @cindex section name
4028 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4029 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4030 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4031 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4032 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4033 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4034 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4035 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4036 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4037 commas must be quoted.
4038
4039 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4040 Discarding}.
4041
4042 @node Output Section Address
4043 @subsection Output Section Address
4044 @cindex address, section
4045 @cindex section address
4046 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4047 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4048 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4049
4050 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4051 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4052 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4053 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4054 contained within the output section.
4055
4056 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4057
4058 @itemize @bullet
4059 @item
4060 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4061 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4062 in that region.
4063
4064 @item
4065 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4066 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4067 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4068 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4069
4070 @item
4071 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4072 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4073 counter.
4074 @end itemize
4075
4076 @noindent
4077 For example:
4078
4079 @smallexample
4080 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4081 @end smallexample
4082
4083 @noindent
4084 and
4085
4086 @smallexample
4087 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4088 @end smallexample
4089
4090 @noindent
4091 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4092 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4093 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4094 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4095 input sections.
4096
4097 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4098 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4099 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4100 do something like this:
4101 @smallexample
4102 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4103 @end smallexample
4104 @noindent
4105 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4106 aligned upward to the specified value.
4107
4108 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4109 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4110 sections are ignored).
4111
4112 @node Input Section
4113 @subsection Input Section Description
4114 @cindex input sections
4115 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4116 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4117
4118 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4119 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4120 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4121 map the input files into your memory layout.
4122
4123 @menu
4124 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4125 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4126 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4127 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4128 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4129 @end menu
4130
4131 @node Input Section Basics
4132 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4133 @cindex input section basics
4134 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4135 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4136
4137 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4138 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4139
4140 The most common input section description is to include all input
4141 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4142 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4143 @smallexample
4144 *(.text)
4145 @end smallexample
4146 @noindent
4147 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4148 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4149 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4150 example:
4151 @smallexample
4152 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4153 @end smallexample
4154 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4155 @file{otherfile.o} to be included.
4156
4157 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4158 @smallexample
4159 *(.text .rdata)
4160 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4161 @end smallexample
4162 @noindent
4163 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4164 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4165 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4166 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4167 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4168 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4169
4170 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4171 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4172 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4173 @smallexample
4174 data.o(.data)
4175 @end smallexample
4176
4177 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4178 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4179
4180 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4181
4182 @smallexample
4183 @group
4184 SECTIONS @{
4185 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4186 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4187 @}
4188 @end group
4189 @end smallexample
4190
4191 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4192 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4193 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4194 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4195 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4196
4197 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4198 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4199 with no whitespace around the colon.
4200
4201 @table @samp
4202 @item archive:file
4203 matches file within archive
4204 @item archive:
4205 matches the whole archive
4206 @item :file
4207 matches file but not one in an archive
4208 @end table
4209
4210 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4211 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4212 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4213 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4214 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4215 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4216 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4217 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4218 command.
4219
4220 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4221 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4222 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4223 @smallexample
4224 data.o
4225 @end smallexample
4226
4227 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4228 and does not contain any wild card
4229 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4230 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4231 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4232 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4233 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4234 the archive search path.
4235
4236 @node Input Section Wildcards
4237 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4238 @cindex input section wildcards
4239 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4240 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4241 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4242 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4243 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4244
4245 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4246 pattern for the file name.
4247
4248 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4249
4250 @table @samp
4251 @item *
4252 matches any number of characters
4253 @item ?
4254 matches any single character
4255 @item [@var{chars}]
4256 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4257 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4258 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4259 @item \
4260 quotes the following character
4261 @end table
4262
4263 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4264 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4265 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4266 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4267 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4268 a @samp{/} character.
4269
4270 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4271 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4272 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4273
4274 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4275 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4276 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4277 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4278 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4279 @smallexample
4280 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4281 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4282 @end smallexample
4283
4284 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4285 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4286 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4287 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4288 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4289 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4290 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4291
4292 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4293 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4294 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4295 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4296 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4297 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4298
4299 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4300 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4301 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4302 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4303 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4304
4305 @cindex SORT
4306 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4307
4308 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4309 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4310
4311 @enumerate
4312 @item
4313 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4314 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4315 sections have the same name.
4316 @item
4317 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4318 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4319 sections have the same alignment.
4320 @item
4321 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4322 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4323 @item
4324 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4325 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4326 @item
4327 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4328 @end enumerate
4329
4330 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4331 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4332 takes precedence over the command line option.
4333
4334 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4335 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4336 treated as nested sorting command.
4337
4338 @enumerate
4339 @item
4340 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4341 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4342 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4343 @item
4344 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4345 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4346 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4347 @end enumerate
4348
4349 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4350 command line option will be ignored.
4351
4352 @cindex SORT_NONE
4353 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4354 section sorting option.
4355
4356 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4357 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4358 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4359
4360 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4361 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4362 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4363 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4364 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4365 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4366 @smallexample
4367 @group
4368 SECTIONS @{
4369 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4370 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4371 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4372 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4373 @}
4374 @end group
4375 @end smallexample
4376
4377 @node Input Section Common
4378 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4379 @cindex common symbol placement
4380 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4381 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4382 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4383 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4384 named @samp{COMMON}.
4385
4386 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4387 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4388 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4389 input files are placed in another section.
4390
4391 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4392 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4393 @smallexample
4394 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4395 @end smallexample
4396
4397 @cindex scommon section
4398 @cindex small common symbols
4399 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4400 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4401 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4402 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4403 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4404 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4405 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4406 locations.
4407
4408 @cindex [COMMON]
4409 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4410 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4411 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4412
4413 @node Input Section Keep
4414 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4415 @cindex KEEP
4416 @cindex garbage collection
4417 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4418 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4419 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4420 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4421 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4422
4423 @node Input Section Example
4424 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4425 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4426 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4427 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4428 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4429 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4430 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4431 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4432 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4433 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4434
4435 @smallexample
4436 @group
4437 SECTIONS @{
4438 outputa 0x10000 :
4439 @{
4440 all.o
4441 foo.o (.input1)
4442 @}
4443 @end group
4444 @group
4445 outputb :
4446 @{
4447 foo.o (.input2)
4448 foo1.o (.input1)
4449 @}
4450 @end group
4451 @group
4452 outputc :
4453 @{
4454 *(.input1)
4455 *(.input2)
4456 @}
4457 @}
4458 @end group
4459 @end smallexample
4460
4461 @node Output Section Data
4462 @subsection Output Section Data
4463 @cindex data
4464 @cindex section data
4465 @cindex output section data
4466 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4467 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4468 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4469 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4470 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4471 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4472 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4473 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4474 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4475 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4476 counter.
4477
4478 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4479 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4480 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4481 stored.
4482
4483 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4484 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4485 @smallexample
4486 BYTE(1)
4487 LONG(addr)
4488 @end smallexample
4489
4490 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4491 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4492 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4493 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4494 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4495
4496 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4497 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4498 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4499 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4500 endianness of the first input object file.
4501
4502 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4503 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4504 @smallexample
4505 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4506 @end smallexample
4507 whereas this will work:
4508 @smallexample
4509 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4510 @end smallexample
4511
4512 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4513 @cindex holes, filling
4514 @cindex unspecified memory
4515 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4516 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4517 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4518 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4519 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4520 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4521 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4522 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4523 different parts of an output section.
4524
4525 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4526 value @samp{0x90}:
4527 @smallexample
4528 FILL(0x90909090)
4529 @end smallexample
4530
4531 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4532 section attribute, but it only affects the
4533 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4534 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4535 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4536 expression.
4537
4538 @node Output Section Keywords
4539 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4540 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4541 commands.
4542
4543 @table @code
4544 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4545 @cindex input filename symbols
4546 @cindex filename symbols
4547 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4548 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4549 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4550 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4551 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4552
4553 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4554 normally used for any other object file format.
4555
4556 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4557 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4558 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4559 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4560 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4561 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4562 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4563 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4564 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4565 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4566 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4567 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4568 ignored for other object file formats.
4569
4570 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4571 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4572 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4573 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4574 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4575 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4576 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4577 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4578 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4579 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4580 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4581 @code{exit}.
4582
4583 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4584 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4585 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4586 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4587 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4588 runtime code expects to see.
4589
4590 @smallexample
4591 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4592 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4593 *(.ctors)
4594 LONG(0)
4595 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4596 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4597 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4598 *(.dtors)
4599 LONG(0)
4600 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4601 @end smallexample
4602
4603 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4604 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4605 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4606 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4607 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4608 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4609 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4610 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4611
4612 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4613 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4614 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4615 scripts.
4616
4617 @end table
4618
4619 @node Output Section Discarding
4620 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4621 @cindex discarding sections
4622 @cindex sections, discarding
4623 @cindex removing sections
4624 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4625 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4626 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4627 @smallexample
4628 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4629 @end smallexample
4630 @noindent
4631 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4632 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4633 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4634 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4635 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4636 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4637 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4638 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4639 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4640
4641 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4642 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4643 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4644 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4645 section is discarded.
4646
4647 @cindex /DISCARD/
4648 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4649 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4650 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4651
4652 @node Output Section Attributes
4653 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4654 @cindex output section attributes
4655 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4656 like this:
4657
4658 @smallexample
4659 @group
4660 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4661 [AT(@var{lma})]
4662 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4663 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4664 [@var{constraint}]
4665 @{
4666 @var{output-section-command}
4667 @var{output-section-command}
4668 @dots{}
4669 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4670 @end group
4671 @end smallexample
4672
4673 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4674 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4675 remaining section attributes.
4676
4677 @menu
4678 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4679 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4680 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4681 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4682 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4683 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4684 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4685 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4686 @end menu
4687
4688 @node Output Section Type
4689 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4690 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4691 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4692
4693 @table @code
4694 @item NOLOAD
4695 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4696 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4697 @item DSECT
4698 @itemx COPY
4699 @itemx INFO
4700 @itemx OVERLAY
4701 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4702 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4703 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4704 section when the program is run.
4705 @end table
4706
4707 @kindex NOLOAD
4708 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4709 @cindex loading, preventing
4710 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4711 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4712 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4713 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4714 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4715 @smallexample
4716 @group
4717 SECTIONS @{
4718 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4719 @dots{}
4720 @}
4721 @end group
4722 @end smallexample
4723
4724 @node Output Section LMA
4725 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4726 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4727 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4728 @cindex load address
4729 @cindex section load address
4730 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4731 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4732 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4733 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4734 address is optional.
4735
4736 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4737 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4738 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4739 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4740 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4741
4742 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4743 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4744 load address:
4745
4746 @itemize @bullet
4747 @item
4748 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4749 the LMA address as well.
4750
4751 @item
4752 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4753
4754 @item
4755 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4756 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4757 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4758 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4759 the last section in the located region.
4760
4761 @item
4762 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4763 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4764
4765 @item
4766 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4767 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4768 @end itemize
4769
4770 @cindex ROM initialized data
4771 @cindex initialized data in ROM
4772 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4773 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4774 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4775 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4776 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4777 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4778 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4779 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4780
4781 @smallexample
4782 @group
4783 SECTIONS
4784 @{
4785 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
4786 .mdata 0x2000 :
4787 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4788 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4789 .bss 0x3000 :
4790 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4791 @}
4792 @end group
4793 @end smallexample
4794
4795 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4796 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4797 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4798 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4799 script.
4800
4801 @smallexample
4802 @group
4803 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4804 char *src = &_etext;
4805 char *dst = &_data;
4806
4807 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4808 while (dst < &_edata)
4809 *dst++ = *src++;
4810
4811 /* Zero bss. */
4812 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4813 *dst = 0;
4814 @end group
4815 @end smallexample
4816
4817 @node Forced Output Alignment
4818 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4819 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4820 @cindex forcing output section alignment
4821 @cindex output section alignment
4822 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
4823 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4824 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
4825
4826 @node Forced Input Alignment
4827 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4828 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4829 @cindex forcing input section alignment
4830 @cindex input section alignment
4831 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4832 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4833 sections, whether larger or smaller.
4834
4835 @node Output Section Constraint
4836 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4837 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4838 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4839 @cindex constraints on output sections
4840 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4841 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4842 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4843 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4844
4845 @node Output Section Region
4846 @subsubsection Output Section Region
4847 @kindex >@var{region}
4848 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
4849 @cindex memory regions and sections
4850 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4851 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4852
4853 Here is a simple example:
4854 @smallexample
4855 @group
4856 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4857 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4858 @end group
4859 @end smallexample
4860
4861 @node Output Section Phdr
4862 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
4863 @kindex :@var{phdr}
4864 @cindex section, assigning to program header
4865 @cindex program headers and sections
4866 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4867 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4868 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4869 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4870 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4871 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4872
4873 Here is a simple example:
4874 @smallexample
4875 @group
4876 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4877 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4878 @end group
4879 @end smallexample
4880
4881 @node Output Section Fill
4882 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
4883 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
4884 @cindex section fill pattern
4885 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
4886 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4887 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4888 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4889 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
4890 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4891 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
4892 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
4893 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4894 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
4895 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
4896 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4897 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
4898
4899 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
4900 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
4901
4902 Here is a simple example:
4903 @smallexample
4904 @group
4905 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
4906 @end group
4907 @end smallexample
4908
4909 @node Overlay Description
4910 @subsection Overlay Description
4911 @kindex OVERLAY
4912 @cindex overlays
4913 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4914 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4915 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4916 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4917 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4918 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4919 than another.
4920
4921 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4922 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4923 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4924 command is as follows:
4925 @smallexample
4926 @group
4927 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4928 @{
4929 @var{secname1}
4930 @{
4931 @var{output-section-command}
4932 @var{output-section-command}
4933 @dots{}
4934 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4935 @var{secname2}
4936 @{
4937 @var{output-section-command}
4938 @var{output-section-command}
4939 @dots{}
4940 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4941 @dots{}
4942 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
4943 @end group
4944 @end smallexample
4945
4946 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4947 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4948 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4949 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4950 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4951 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4952
4953 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4954 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4955
4956 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4957 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4958 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4959 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4960 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4961 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4962
4963 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4964 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4965 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4966 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4967 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
4968
4969 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
4970 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
4971 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4972 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4973 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4974 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4975 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4976
4977 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4978 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4979
4980 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4981 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
4982 @smallexample
4983 @group
4984 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4985 @{
4986 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4987 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4988 @}
4989 @end group
4990 @end smallexample
4991 @noindent
4992 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4993 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4994 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
4995 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
4996 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4997 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
4998
4999 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5000 like the following.
5001
5002 @smallexample
5003 @group
5004 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5005 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5006 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5007 @end group
5008 @end smallexample
5009
5010 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5011 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5012 example could have been written identically as follows.
5013
5014 @smallexample
5015 @group
5016 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5017 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5018 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5019 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5020 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5021 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5022 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5023 @end group
5024 @end smallexample
5025
5026 @node MEMORY
5027 @section MEMORY Command
5028 @kindex MEMORY
5029 @cindex memory regions
5030 @cindex regions of memory
5031 @cindex allocating memory
5032 @cindex discontinuous memory
5033 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5034 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5035
5036 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5037 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5038 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5039 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5040 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5041 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5042 around to fit into the available regions.
5043
5044 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5045 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5046 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5047 @code{MEMORY} is:
5048 @smallexample
5049 @group
5050 MEMORY
5051 @{
5052 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5053 @dots{}
5054 @}
5055 @end group
5056 @end smallexample
5057
5058 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5059 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5060 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5061 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5062 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5063 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5064 command.
5065
5066 @cindex memory region attributes
5067 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5068 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5069 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5070 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5071 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5072 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5073 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5074
5075 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5076 @table @samp
5077 @item R
5078 Read-only section
5079 @item W
5080 Read/write section
5081 @item X
5082 Executable section
5083 @item A
5084 Allocatable section
5085 @item I
5086 Initialized section
5087 @item L
5088 Same as @samp{I}
5089 @item !
5090 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5091 @end table
5092
5093 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5094 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5095 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5096 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5097 attributes.
5098
5099 @kindex ORIGIN =
5100 @kindex o =
5101 @kindex org =
5102 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5103 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5104 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5105 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5106 @code{ORG}).
5107
5108 @kindex LENGTH =
5109 @kindex len =
5110 @kindex l =
5111 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5112 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5113 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5114 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5115
5116 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5117 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5118 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5119 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5120 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5121 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5122 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5123 region.
5124
5125 @smallexample
5126 @group
5127 MEMORY
5128 @{
5129 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5130 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5131 @}
5132 @end group
5133 @end smallexample
5134
5135 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5136 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5137 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5138 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5139 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5140 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5141 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5142 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5143 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5144
5145 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5146 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5147 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5148
5149 @smallexample
5150 @group
5151 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5152 @end group
5153 @end smallexample
5154
5155 @node PHDRS
5156 @section PHDRS Command
5157 @kindex PHDRS
5158 @cindex program headers
5159 @cindex ELF program headers
5160 @cindex program segments
5161 @cindex segments, ELF
5162 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5163 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5164 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5165 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5166
5167 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5168 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5169 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5170 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5171 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5172
5173 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5174 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5175 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5176 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5177 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5178
5179 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5180 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5181 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5182
5183 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5184 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5185
5186 @smallexample
5187 @group
5188 PHDRS
5189 @{
5190 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5191 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5192 @}
5193 @end group
5194 @end smallexample
5195
5196 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5197 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5198 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5199 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5200 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5201 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5202
5203 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5204 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5205 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5206 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5207 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5208 Section Phdr}.
5209
5210 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5211 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5212 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5213 contain the section.
5214
5215 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5216 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5217 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5218 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5219 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5220 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5221 segment at all.
5222
5223 @kindex FILEHDR
5224 @kindex PHDRS
5225 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5226 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5227 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5228 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5229 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5230 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5231 these keywords.
5232
5233 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5234 value of the keyword.
5235
5236 @table @asis
5237 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5238 Indicates an unused program header.
5239
5240 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5241 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5242 the file.
5243
5244 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5245 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5246
5247 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5248 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5249 found.
5250
5251 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5252 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5253
5254 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5255 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5256 ABI.
5257
5258 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5259 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5260
5261 @item @var{expression}
5262 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5263 be used for types not defined above.
5264 @end table
5265
5266 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5267 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5268 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5269 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5270 output section attribute.
5271
5272 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5273 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5274 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5275 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5276 header.
5277
5278 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5279 headers used on a native ELF system.
5280
5281 @example
5282 @group
5283 PHDRS
5284 @{
5285 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5286 interp PT_INTERP ;
5287 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5288 data PT_LOAD ;
5289 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5290 @}
5291
5292 SECTIONS
5293 @{
5294 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5295 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5296 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5297 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5298 @dots{}
5299 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5300 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5301 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5302 @dots{}
5303 @}
5304 @end group
5305 @end example
5306
5307 @node VERSION
5308 @section VERSION Command
5309 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5310 @cindex symbol versions
5311 @cindex version script
5312 @cindex versions of symbols
5313 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5314 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5315 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5316 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5317 shared library.
5318
5319 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5320 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5321 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5322
5323 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5324 @smallexample
5325 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5326 @end smallexample
5327
5328 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5329 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5330 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5331 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5332 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5333 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5334 library.
5335
5336 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5337 examples.
5338
5339 @smallexample
5340 VERS_1.1 @{
5341 global:
5342 foo1;
5343 local:
5344 old*;
5345 original*;
5346 new*;
5347 @};
5348
5349 VERS_1.2 @{
5350 foo2;
5351 @} VERS_1.1;
5352
5353 VERS_2.0 @{
5354 bar1; bar2;
5355 extern "C++" @{
5356 ns::*;
5357 "f(int, double)";
5358 @};
5359 @} VERS_1.2;
5360 @end smallexample
5361
5362 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5363 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5364 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5365 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5366 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5367 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5368 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5369 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5370 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5371 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5372
5373 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5374 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5375 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5376
5377 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5378 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5379 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5380
5381 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5382 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5383 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5384 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5385 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5386 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5387 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5388 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5389 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5390
5391 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5392 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5393 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5394 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5395
5396 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5397 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5398 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5399 won't.
5400
5401 @smallexample
5402 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5403 @end smallexample
5404
5405 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5406 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5407 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5408 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5409 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5410 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5411 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5412 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5413 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5414 search for each symbol reference.
5415
5416 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5417 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5418 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5419 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5420 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5421 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5422 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5423 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5424 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5425
5426 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5427 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5428 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5429 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5430 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5431 @smallexample
5432 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5433 @end smallexample
5434 @noindent
5435 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5436 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5437 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5438 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5439 takes precedence over a version script.
5440
5441 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5442 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5443 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5444 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5445 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5446
5447 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5448 source file. Here is an example:
5449
5450 @smallexample
5451 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5452 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5453 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5454 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5455 @end smallexample
5456
5457 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5458 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5459 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5460 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5461
5462 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5463 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5464 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5465 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5466 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5467 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5468
5469 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5470 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5471 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5472 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5473
5474 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5475
5476 @smallexample
5477 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5478 @end smallexample
5479
5480 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5481 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5482 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5483 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5484 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5485
5486 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5487 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5488 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5489 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5490 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5491 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5492 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5493 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5494 expect when you upgrade.
5495
5496 @node Expressions
5497 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5498 @cindex expressions
5499 @cindex arithmetic
5500 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5501 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5502 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5503 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5504
5505 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5506
5507 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5508 expressions.
5509
5510 @menu
5511 * Constants:: Constants
5512 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5513 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5514 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5515 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5516 * Operators:: Operators
5517 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5518 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5519 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5520 @end menu
5521
5522 @node Constants
5523 @subsection Constants
5524 @cindex integer notation
5525 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5526 All constants are integers.
5527
5528 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5529 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5530 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5531 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5532 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5533 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5534
5535 @cindex scaled integers
5536 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5537 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5538 @cindex suffixes for integers
5539 @cindex integer suffixes
5540 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5541 constant by
5542 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5543 @ifnottex
5544 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5545 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5546 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5547 @end ifnottex
5548 @tex
5549 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5550 @end tex
5551 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5552 respectively. For example, the following
5553 all refer to the same quantity:
5554
5555 @smallexample
5556 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5557 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5558 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5559 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5560 @end smallexample
5561
5562 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5563 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5564
5565 @node Symbolic Constants
5566 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5567 @cindex symbolic constants
5568 @kindex CONSTANT
5569 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5570 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5571
5572 @table @code
5573 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5574 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5575 The target's maximum page size.
5576
5577 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5578 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5579 The target's default page size.
5580 @end table
5581
5582 So for example:
5583
5584 @smallexample
5585 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5586 @end smallexample
5587
5588 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5589 supported by the target.
5590
5591 @node Symbols
5592 @subsection Symbol Names
5593 @cindex symbol names
5594 @cindex names
5595 @cindex quoted symbol names
5596 @kindex "
5597 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5598 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5599 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5600 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5601 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5602 @smallexample
5603 "SECTION" = 9;
5604 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5605 @end smallexample
5606
5607 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5608 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5609 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5610
5611 @node Orphan Sections
5612 @subsection Orphan Sections
5613 @cindex orphan
5614 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5615 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5616 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5617 output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5618 placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5619 attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5620 same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5621 If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5622 at the end of the file.
5623
5624 For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5625 well as section flag.
5626
5627 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5628 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5629 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5630
5631 If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
5632 the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
5633 __start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5634 section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5635 orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5636 representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5637 character.
5638
5639 @node Location Counter
5640 @subsection The Location Counter
5641 @kindex .
5642 @cindex dot
5643 @cindex location counter
5644 @cindex current output location
5645 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5646 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5647 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5648 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5649 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5650
5651 @cindex holes
5652 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5653 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5654 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5655 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5656 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5657
5658 @smallexample
5659 SECTIONS
5660 @{
5661 output :
5662 @{
5663 file1(.text)
5664 . = . + 1000;
5665 file2(.text)
5666 . += 1000;
5667 file3(.text)
5668 @} = 0x12345678;
5669 @}
5670 @end smallexample
5671 @noindent
5672 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5673 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5674 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5675 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5676 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5677 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5678
5679 @cindex dot inside sections
5680 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5681 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5682 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5683 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5684 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5685 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5686
5687 @smallexample
5688 SECTIONS
5689 @{
5690 . = 0x100
5691 .text: @{
5692 *(.text)
5693 . = 0x200
5694 @}
5695 . = 0x500
5696 .data: @{
5697 *(.data)
5698 . += 0x600
5699 @}
5700 @}
5701 @end smallexample
5702
5703 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5704 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5705 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5706 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5707 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5708 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5709 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5710 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5711
5712 @cindex dot outside sections
5713 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5714 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5715 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5716
5717 @smallexample
5718 SECTIONS
5719 @{
5720 start_of_text = . ;
5721 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5722 end_of_text = . ;
5723
5724 start_of_data = . ;
5725 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5726 end_of_data = . ;
5727 @}
5728 @end smallexample
5729
5730 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5731 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5732 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5733 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5734 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5735 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5736 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5737 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5738 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5739 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5740 as follows:
5741
5742 @smallexample
5743 SECTIONS
5744 @{
5745 start_of_text = . ;
5746 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5747 end_of_text = . ;
5748
5749 start_of_data = . ;
5750 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5751 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5752 end_of_data = . ;
5753 @}
5754 @end smallexample
5755
5756 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5757 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5758 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5759 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5760 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5761 section. So you could write:
5762
5763 @smallexample
5764 SECTIONS
5765 @{
5766 start_of_text = . ;
5767 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5768 end_of_text = . ;
5769
5770 . = . ;
5771 start_of_data = . ;
5772 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5773 end_of_data = . ;
5774 @}
5775 @end smallexample
5776
5777 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5778 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5779
5780 @need 2000
5781 @node Operators
5782 @subsection Operators
5783 @cindex operators for arithmetic
5784 @cindex arithmetic operators
5785 @cindex precedence in expressions
5786 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5787 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5788 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5789 @ifnottex
5790 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5791 @smallexample
5792 precedence associativity Operators Notes
5793 (highest)
5794 1 left ! - ~ (1)
5795 2 left * / %
5796 3 left + -
5797 4 left >> <<
5798 5 left == != > < <= >=
5799 6 left &
5800 7 left |
5801 8 left &&
5802 9 left ||
5803 10 right ? :
5804 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5805 (lowest)
5806 @end smallexample
5807 Notes:
5808 (1) Prefix operators
5809 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
5810 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5811 @end ifnottex
5812 @tex
5813 \vskip \baselineskip
5814 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5815 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5816 \hrule
5817 \halign
5818 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5819 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5820 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5821 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5822 \noalign{\hrule}
5823 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5824 &highest&&&&&\cr
5825 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
5826 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
5827 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5828 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5829 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5830 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5831 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
5832 &7&&left&&|&\cr
5833 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5834 &9&&left&&||&\cr
5835 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
5836 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5837 &lowest&&&&&\cr
5838 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5839 \hrule}
5840 @end tex
5841 @iftex
5842 {
5843 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5844 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
5845 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5846 }
5847 @end iftex
5848 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5849
5850 @node Evaluation
5851 @subsection Evaluation
5852 @cindex lazy evaluation
5853 @cindex expression evaluation order
5854 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5855 an expression when absolutely necessary.
5856
5857 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5858 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5859 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5860 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5861
5862 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5863 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5864 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5865 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5866
5867 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5868 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5869 allocation.
5870
5871 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5872 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5873
5874 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5875 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5876 following
5877 @smallexample
5878 @group
5879 SECTIONS
5880 @{
5881 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
5882 @{ *(.text) @}
5883 @}
5884 @end group
5885 @end smallexample
5886 @noindent
5887 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5888 address}.
5889
5890 @node Expression Section
5891 @subsection The Section of an Expression
5892 @cindex expression sections
5893 @cindex absolute expressions
5894 @cindex relative expressions
5895 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5896 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5897 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5898 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5899 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5900 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5901 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5902 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5903 operations.
5904
5905 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5906 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5907 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5908 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5909 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
5910 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5911 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5912 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5913 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5914 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5915 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
5916 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5917 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5918 everywhere.
5919
5920 In the following simple example,
5921
5922 @smallexample
5923 @group
5924 SECTIONS
5925 @{
5926 . = 0x100;
5927 __executable_start = 0x100;
5928 .data :
5929 @{
5930 . = 0x10;
5931 __data_start = 0x10;
5932 *(.data)
5933 @}
5934 @dots{}
5935 @}
5936 @end group
5937 @end smallexample
5938
5939 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5940 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5941 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5942 section in the second two assignments.
5943
5944 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5945 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
5946
5947 @itemize @bullet
5948 @item
5949 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5950 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5951 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5952 @item
5953 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5954 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5955 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5956 @item
5957 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5958 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5959 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5960 before applying the operator.
5961 @end itemize
5962
5963 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5964
5965 @itemize @bullet
5966 @item
5967 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5968 @item
5969 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5970 @item
5971 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5972 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
5973 (after above conversions) is also a number.
5974 @item
5975 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5976 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5977 section as the relative operand(s).
5978 @item
5979 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5980 conversions) is an absolute address.
5981 @end itemize
5982
5983 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5984 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5985 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5986 section @samp{.data}:
5987 @smallexample
5988 SECTIONS
5989 @{
5990 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5991 @}
5992 @end smallexample
5993 @noindent
5994 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5995 @samp{.data} section.
5996
5997 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5998 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5999
6000 @node Builtin Functions
6001 @subsection Builtin Functions
6002 @cindex functions in expressions
6003 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6004 use in linker script expressions.
6005
6006 @table @code
6007 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6008 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6009 @cindex expression, absolute
6010 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6011 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6012 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6013 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6014
6015 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6016 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6017 @cindex section address in expression
6018 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6019 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6020 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6021 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6022 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6023 the other two will be absolute:
6024 @smallexample
6025 @group
6026 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6027 .output1 :
6028 @{
6029 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6030 @dots{}
6031 @}
6032 .output :
6033 @{
6034 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6035 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6036 @}
6037 @dots{} @}
6038 @end group
6039 @end smallexample
6040
6041 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6042 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6043 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6044 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6045 @cindex round up location counter
6046 @cindex align location counter
6047 @cindex round up expression
6048 @cindex align expression
6049 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6050 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6051 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6052 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6053 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6054 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6055
6056 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6057 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6058 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6059 input sections:
6060 @smallexample
6061 @group
6062 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6063 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6064 *(.data)
6065 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6066 @}
6067 @dots{} @}
6068 @end group
6069 @end smallexample
6070 @noindent
6071 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6072 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6073 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6074 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6075
6076 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6077
6078 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6079 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6080 @cindex section alignment
6081 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6082 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6083 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6084 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6085 value in that section.
6086 @smallexample
6087 @group
6088 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6089 .output @{
6090 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6091 @dots{}
6092 @}
6093 @dots{} @}
6094 @end group
6095 @end smallexample
6096
6097 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6098 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6099 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6100 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6101 section.
6102
6103 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6104 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6105 This is equivalent to either
6106 @smallexample
6107 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6108 @end smallexample
6109 or
6110 @smallexample
6111 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6112 @end smallexample
6113 @noindent
6114 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6115 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6116 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6117 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6118 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6119 bytes in the on-disk file.
6120
6121 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6122 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6123 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6124 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6125 working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6126
6127 @noindent
6128 Example:
6129 @smallexample
6130 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6131 @end smallexample
6132
6133 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6134 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6135 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6136 evaluation purposes.
6137
6138 @smallexample
6139 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6140 @end smallexample
6141
6142 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6143 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6144 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6145 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6146 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6147 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6148 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6149 boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6150 it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6151 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6152 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6153 section alignment.
6154
6155 @smallexample
6156 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6157 @end smallexample
6158
6159 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6160 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6161 @cindex symbol defaults
6162 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6163 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6164 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6165 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6166 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6167 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6168 existed, its value is preserved:
6169
6170 @smallexample
6171 @group
6172 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6173 .text : @{
6174 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6175 @dots{}
6176 @}
6177 @dots{}
6178 @}
6179 @end group
6180 @end smallexample
6181
6182 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6183 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6184 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6185
6186 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6187 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6188 @cindex section load address in expression
6189 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6190 Section LMA}).
6191
6192 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6193 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6194 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6195 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6196
6197 @kindex MAX
6198 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6199 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6200
6201 @kindex MIN
6202 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6203 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6204
6205 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6206 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6207 @cindex unallocated address, next
6208 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6209 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6210 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6211 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6212
6213 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6214 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6215 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6216
6217 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6218 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6219 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6220 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6221 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6222 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6223 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6224 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6225 name.
6226
6227 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6228 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6229 @cindex section size
6230 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6231 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6232 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6233 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6234 @smallexample
6235 @group
6236 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6237 .output @{
6238 .start = . ;
6239 @dots{}
6240 .end = . ;
6241 @}
6242 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6243 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6244 @dots{} @}
6245 @end group
6246 @end smallexample
6247
6248 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6249 @itemx sizeof_headers
6250 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6251 @cindex header size
6252 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6253 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6254 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6255 choose, to facilitate paging.
6256
6257 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6258 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6259 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6260 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6261 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6262 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6263 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6264 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6265 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6266 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6267 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6268 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6269 @end table
6270
6271 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6272 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6273 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6274 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6275 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6276 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6277 linker will report an error.
6278
6279 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6280
6281 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6282 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6283 commands.
6284
6285 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6286 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6287 read. This can affect archive searching.
6288
6289 @ifset GENERIC
6290 @node Machine Dependent
6291 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6292
6293 @cindex machine dependencies
6294 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6295 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6296 functionality are not listed.
6297
6298 @menu
6299 @ifset H8300
6300 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6301 @end ifset
6302 @ifset I960
6303 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6304 @end ifset
6305 @ifset M68HC11
6306 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6307 @end ifset
6308 @ifset ARM
6309 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6310 @end ifset
6311 @ifset HPPA
6312 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6313 @end ifset
6314 @ifset M68K
6315 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6316 @end ifset
6317 @ifset MIPS
6318 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6319 @end ifset
6320 @ifset MMIX
6321 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6322 @end ifset
6323 @ifset MSP430
6324 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6325 @end ifset
6326 @ifset NDS32
6327 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6328 @end ifset
6329 @ifset NIOSII
6330 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6331 @end ifset
6332 @ifset POWERPC
6333 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6334 @end ifset
6335 @ifset POWERPC64
6336 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6337 @end ifset
6338 @ifset SPU
6339 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6340 @end ifset
6341 @ifset TICOFF
6342 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6343 @end ifset
6344 @ifset WIN32
6345 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6346 @end ifset
6347 @ifset XTENSA
6348 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6349 @end ifset
6350 @end menu
6351 @end ifset
6352
6353 @ifset H8300
6354 @ifclear GENERIC
6355 @raisesections
6356 @end ifclear
6357
6358 @node H8/300
6359 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6360
6361 @cindex H8/300 support
6362 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6363 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6364
6365 @table @emph
6366 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6367 @item relaxing address modes
6368 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6369 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6370 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6371 respectively.
6372
6373 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6374 @item synthesizing instructions
6375 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6376 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6377 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6378 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6379 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6380 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6381 top page of memory).
6382
6383 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6384 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6385 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6386 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6387 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6388 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6389 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6390
6391 @item bit manipulation instructions
6392 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6393 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6394 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6395 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6396 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6397 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6398 the top page of memory).
6399
6400 @item system control instructions
6401 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6402 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6403 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6404 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6405 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6406 the top page of memory).
6407 @end table
6408
6409 @ifclear GENERIC
6410 @lowersections
6411 @end ifclear
6412 @end ifset
6413
6414 @ifclear GENERIC
6415 @ifset Renesas
6416 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6417 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6418 @node Renesas
6419 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6420
6421 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6422 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6423 options are required for these chips.
6424 @end ifset
6425 @end ifclear
6426
6427 @ifset I960
6428 @ifclear GENERIC
6429 @raisesections
6430 @end ifclear
6431
6432 @node i960
6433 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6434
6435 @cindex i960 support
6436
6437 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6438 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6439 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6440 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6441 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6442 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6443 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6444
6445 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6446 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6447 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6448 the names
6449
6450 @smallexample
6451 @group
6452 try
6453 libtry.a
6454 tryca
6455 libtryca.a
6456 @end group
6457 @end smallexample
6458
6459 @noindent
6460 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6461 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6462
6463 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6464 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6465 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6466 specifies a library.
6467
6468 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6469 @cindex relaxing on i960
6470 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6471 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6472 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6473 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6474 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6475 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6476 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6477 not itself call any subroutines).
6478
6479 @ifclear GENERIC
6480 @lowersections
6481 @end ifclear
6482 @end ifset
6483
6484 @ifset ARM
6485 @ifclear GENERIC
6486 @raisesections
6487 @end ifclear
6488
6489 @ifset M68HC11
6490 @ifclear GENERIC
6491 @raisesections
6492 @end ifclear
6493
6494 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6495 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6496
6497 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6498
6499 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6500
6501 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6502 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6503
6504 @table @emph
6505 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6506 @item relaxing address modes
6507 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6508 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6509 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6510 respectively.
6511
6512 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6513 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6514 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6515
6516 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6517 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6518 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6519 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6520 @code{bset} instructions.
6521
6522 @end table
6523
6524 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6525
6526 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6527 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6528 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6529 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6530 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6531 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6532 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6533 point to the function trampoline.
6534
6535 @ifclear GENERIC
6536 @lowersections
6537 @end ifclear
6538 @end ifset
6539
6540 @node ARM
6541 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6542
6543 @cindex ARM interworking support
6544 @kindex --support-old-code
6545 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6546 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6547 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6548 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6549 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6550 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6551 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6552 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6553 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6554 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6555
6556 @cindex thumb entry point
6557 @cindex entry point, thumb
6558 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6559 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6560 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6561 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6562 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6563 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6564
6565 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6566 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6567 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6568 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6569 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6570 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6571
6572 @cindex BE8
6573 @kindex --be8
6574 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6575 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6576 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6577 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6578 little-endian code.
6579
6580 @cindex TARGET1
6581 @kindex --target1-rel
6582 @kindex --target1-abs
6583 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6584 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6585 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6586 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6587
6588 @cindex TARGET2
6589 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6590 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6591 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6592 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6593 @table @samp
6594 @item rel
6595 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6596 @item abs
6597 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6598 @item got-rel
6599 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6600 @end table
6601
6602 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6603 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6604 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6605 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6606 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6607 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6608
6609 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6610 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6611 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6612
6613 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6614 relocations are ignored.
6615
6616 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6617 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6618 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6619 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6620
6621 @smallexample
6622 TST rM, #1
6623 MOVEQ PC, rM
6624 BX Rn
6625 @end smallexample
6626
6627 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6628 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6629 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6630
6631 @cindex USE_BLX
6632 @kindex --use-blx
6633 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6634 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6635 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6636 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6637 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6638
6639 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6640 specify it if you are using that target.
6641
6642 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6643 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6644 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6645 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6646 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6647 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6648 the support code can read the intended values.
6649
6650 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6651 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6652 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6653 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6654 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6655 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6656
6657 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6658 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6659 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6660 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6661 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6662 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6663
6664 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6665 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6666 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6667 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6668 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6669 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6670 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6671
6672 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6673 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6674 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6675 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6676 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6677 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6678 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6679
6680 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6681 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6682 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6683
6684 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6685 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6686
6687 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6688 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6689 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6690 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6691 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6692 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6693 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6694 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6695
6696 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6697 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6698
6699 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6700 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6701 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6702 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6703 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6704
6705 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6706 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6707 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6708 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6709 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6710 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6711
6712 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6713 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6714
6715 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6716 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6717 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6718 occurs.
6719
6720 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6721 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6722 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6723 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6724 occurs.
6725
6726 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6727 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6728 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6729 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6730 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6731 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6732 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6733 not be diagnosed.
6734
6735 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6736 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6737 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6738 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6739 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6740 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6741 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6742
6743 @cindex PIC_VENEER
6744 @kindex --pic-veneer
6745 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6746 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6747 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6748 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6749
6750 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6751 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6752 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6753 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6754 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6755 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6756 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6757 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6758 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
6759 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6760 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6761 where they should be placed.
6762
6763 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6764 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
6765 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
6766 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6767 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6768 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6769 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6770 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6771 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6772 from the input sections.
6773
6774 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6775 @samp{N = +1}.
6776
6777 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6778 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6779 otherwise.
6780
6781 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6782 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6783 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6784 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6785
6786 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6787
6788 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6789 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6790 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6791 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6792
6793 Please contact ARM for further details.
6794
6795 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6796 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6797 @cindex Merging exidx entries
6798 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6799
6800 @kindex --long-plt
6801 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6802 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6803 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6804 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6805
6806 @ifclear GENERIC
6807 @lowersections
6808 @end ifclear
6809 @end ifset
6810
6811 @ifset HPPA
6812 @ifclear GENERIC
6813 @raisesections
6814 @end ifclear
6815
6816 @node HPPA ELF32
6817 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6818 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6819 @kindex --multi-subspace
6820 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6821 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6822 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6823 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6824 multiple sub-spaces.
6825
6826 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
6827 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6828 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6829 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6830 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6831 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6832 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6833 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6834 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6835 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6836 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6837 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6838 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6839 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6840 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6841 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6842
6843 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6844 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6845 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6846 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6847
6848 @ifclear GENERIC
6849 @lowersections
6850 @end ifclear
6851 @end ifset
6852
6853 @ifset M68K
6854 @ifclear GENERIC
6855 @raisesections
6856 @end ifclear
6857
6858 @node M68K
6859 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6860
6861 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6862 @kindex --got=@var{type}
6863 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6864 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6865 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6866 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6867 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6868 entries only at non-negative offsets.
6869 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6870 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6871 support such GOTs.
6872 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6873 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6874 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6875 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6876
6877 @ifclear GENERIC
6878 @lowersections
6879 @end ifclear
6880 @end ifset
6881
6882 @ifset MIPS
6883 @ifclear GENERIC
6884 @raisesections
6885 @end ifclear
6886
6887 @node MIPS
6888 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6889
6890 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6891 @kindex --insn32
6892 @kindex --no-insn32
6893 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6894 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6895 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6896 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6897 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6898 including 16-bit ones where possible.
6899
6900 @ifclear GENERIC
6901 @lowersections
6902 @end ifclear
6903 @end ifset
6904
6905 @ifset MMIX
6906 @ifclear GENERIC
6907 @raisesections
6908 @end ifclear
6909
6910 @node MMIX
6911 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
6912 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6913 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6914 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6915 can translate between the two formats.
6916
6917 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6918 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6919 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6920 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6921 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6922 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6923 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6924 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6925
6926 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6927 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6928 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6929 of a section.
6930
6931 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6932 are left out from an mmo file.
6933
6934 @ifclear GENERIC
6935 @lowersections
6936 @end ifclear
6937 @end ifset
6938
6939 @ifset MSP430
6940 @ifclear GENERIC
6941 @raisesections
6942 @end ifclear
6943
6944 @node MSP430
6945 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
6946 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6947 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6948 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6949
6950 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
6951 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6952
6953 @table @code
6954 @item @samp{.vectors}
6955 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6956
6957 @item @samp{.bootloader}
6958 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6959 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6960
6961 @item @samp{.infomem}
6962 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6963 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6964
6965 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
6966 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6967 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6968
6969 @item @samp{.noinit}
6970 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6971
6972 The last two sections are used by gcc.
6973 @end table
6974
6975 @ifclear GENERIC
6976 @lowersections
6977 @end ifclear
6978 @end ifset
6979
6980 @ifset NDS32
6981 @ifclear GENERIC
6982 @raisesections
6983 @end ifclear
6984
6985 @node NDS32
6986 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
6987 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
6988 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
6989 relaxes objects according to these options.
6990
6991 @table @code
6992 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
6993 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
6994
6995 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
6996 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
6997
6998 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
6999 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7000
7001 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7002 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7003
7004 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7005 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7006
7007 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7008 Update the existing EX9 table.
7009
7010 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7011 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7012
7013 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7014 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7015
7016 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7017 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7018
7019 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7020 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7021 @end table
7022
7023 @ifclear GENERIC
7024 @lowersections
7025 @end ifclear
7026 @end ifset
7027
7028 @ifset NIOSII
7029 @ifclear GENERIC
7030 @raisesections
7031 @end ifclear
7032
7033 @node Nios II
7034 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7035 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7036 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7037
7038 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7039 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7040 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7041 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7042 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7043 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7044 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7045 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7046 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7047 larger than 256MB.
7048
7049 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7050 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7051 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7052 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7053 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7054 register as a temporary.
7055
7056 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7057 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7058 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7059
7060 @ifclear GENERIC
7061 @lowersections
7062 @end ifclear
7063 @end ifset
7064
7065 @ifset POWERPC
7066 @ifclear GENERIC
7067 @raisesections
7068 @end ifclear
7069
7070 @node PowerPC ELF32
7071 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7072 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7073 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7074 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7075 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7076 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7077 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7078 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7079 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7080 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7081 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7082 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7083 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7084
7085 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7086 @table @option
7087 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7088 @kindex --bss-plt
7089 @item --bss-plt
7090 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7091 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7092 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7093 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7094 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7095 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7096 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7097 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7098
7099 @kindex --secure-plt
7100 @item --secure-plt
7101 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7102 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7103 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7104 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7105 style BSS PLT.
7106
7107 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7108 @kindex --sdata-got
7109 @item --sdata-got
7110 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7111 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7112 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7113 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7114 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7115 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7116 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7117 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7118 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7119 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7120 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7121 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7122
7123 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7124 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7125 @item --emit-stub-syms
7126 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7127 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7128
7129 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7130 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7131 @item --no-tls-optimize
7132 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7133 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7134 disable the optimization.
7135 @end table
7136
7137 @ifclear GENERIC
7138 @lowersections
7139 @end ifclear
7140 @end ifset
7141
7142 @ifset POWERPC64
7143 @ifclear GENERIC
7144 @raisesections
7145 @end ifclear
7146
7147 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7148 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7149
7150 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7151 @table @option
7152 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7153 @kindex --stub-group-size
7154 @item --stub-group-size
7155 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7156 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7157 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7158 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7159 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7160 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7161 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7162 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7163 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7164 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7165 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7166 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7167 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7168 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7169
7170 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7171 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7172 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7173 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7174
7175 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7176 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7177 @item --emit-stub-syms
7178 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7179 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7180
7181 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7182 @kindex --dotsyms
7183 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7184 @item --dotsyms
7185 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7186 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7187 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7188 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7189 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7190 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7191 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7192 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7193 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7194 feature.
7195
7196 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7197 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7198 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7199 @item --save-restore-funcs
7200 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7201 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7202 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7203 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7204 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7205 link.
7206
7207 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7208 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7209 @item --no-tls-optimize
7210 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7211 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7212 disable the optimization.
7213
7214 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7215 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7216 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7217 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7218 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7219 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7220 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7221 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7222 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7223 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7224 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7225 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7226 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7227 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7228 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7229
7230 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7231 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7232 @item --no-opd-optimize
7233 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7234 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7235 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7236 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7237
7238 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7239 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7240 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7241 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7242 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7243 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7244 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7245
7246 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7247 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7248 @item --no-toc-optimize
7249 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7250 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7251 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7252 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7253 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7254 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7255 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7256 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7257 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7258 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7259 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7260 optimization.
7261
7262 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7263 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7264 @item --no-multi-toc
7265 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7266 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7267 where TOC
7268 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7269 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7270 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7271 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7272 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7273 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7274 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7275 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7276
7277 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7278 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7279 @item --no-toc-sort
7280 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7281 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7282 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7283 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7284 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7285 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7286 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7287 off this feature.
7288
7289 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7290 @kindex --plt-align
7291 @kindex --no-plt-align
7292 @item --plt-align
7293 @itemx --no-plt-align
7294 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7295 padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7296 specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7297 that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7298 stubs are packed tightly.
7299
7300 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7301 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7302 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7303 @item --plt-static-chain
7304 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7305 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7306 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7307 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7308
7309 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7310 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7311 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7312 @item --plt-thread-safe
7313 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7314 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7315 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7316 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7317 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7318 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7319 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7320 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7321 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7322 default behaviour.
7323 @end table
7324
7325 @ifclear GENERIC
7326 @lowersections
7327 @end ifclear
7328 @end ifset
7329
7330 @ifset SPU
7331 @ifclear GENERIC
7332 @raisesections
7333 @end ifclear
7334
7335 @node SPU ELF
7336 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7337
7338 @cindex SPU ELF options
7339 @table @option
7340
7341 @cindex SPU plugins
7342 @kindex --plugin
7343 @item --plugin
7344 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7345
7346 @cindex SPU overlays
7347 @kindex --no-overlays
7348 @item --no-overlays
7349 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7350 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7351 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7352 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7353
7354 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7355 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7356 @item --emit-stub-syms
7357 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7358 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7359
7360 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7361 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7362 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7363 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7364 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7365 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7366
7367 @cindex SPU local store size
7368 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7369 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7370 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7371 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7372 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7373
7374 @cindex SPU
7375 @kindex --stack-analysis
7376 @item --stack-analysis
7377 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7378 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7379 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7380 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7381 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7382 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7383 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7384 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7385 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7386 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7387 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7388 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7389 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7390 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7391 and calls will be given.
7392
7393 @cindex SPU
7394 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7395 @item --emit-stack-syms
7396 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7397 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7398 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7399 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7400 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7401 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7402 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7403 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7404 @end table
7405
7406 @ifclear GENERIC
7407 @lowersections
7408 @end ifclear
7409 @end ifset
7410
7411 @ifset TICOFF
7412 @ifclear GENERIC
7413 @raisesections
7414 @end ifclear
7415
7416 @node TI COFF
7417 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7418 @cindex TI COFF versions
7419 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7420 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7421 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7422 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7423 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7424 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7425
7426 @ifclear GENERIC
7427 @lowersections
7428 @end ifclear
7429 @end ifset
7430
7431 @ifset WIN32
7432 @ifclear GENERIC
7433 @raisesections
7434 @end ifclear
7435
7436 @node WIN32
7437 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7438
7439 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7440 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7441 command line options mentioned here.
7442
7443 @table @emph
7444 @cindex import libraries
7445 @item import libraries
7446 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7447 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7448 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7449 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7450 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7451 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7452
7453 @item exporting DLL symbols
7454 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7455 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7456
7457 @table @emph
7458 @item using auto-export functionality
7459 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7460 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7461 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7462
7463 @itemize
7464 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7465 @item --exclude-symbols
7466 @item --exclude-libs
7467 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7468 @item --version-script
7469 @end itemize
7470
7471 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7472 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7473 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7474 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7475 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7476 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7477 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7478 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7479
7480 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7481 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7482 if either of the following are true:
7483
7484 @itemize
7485 @item A DEF file is used.
7486 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7487 @end itemize
7488
7489 @item using a DEF file
7490 @cindex using a DEF file
7491 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7492 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7493 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7494 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7495 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7496
7497 @example
7498 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7499 @end example
7500
7501 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7502 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7503
7504 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7505
7506 @example
7507 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7508
7509 EXPORTS
7510 foo
7511 bar
7512 _bar = bar
7513 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7514 var1 DATA
7515 doo = foo == foo2
7516 eoo DATA == var1
7517 @end example
7518
7519 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7520 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7521 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7522 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7523 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7524 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7525 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7526 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7527 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7528
7529 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7530 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7531 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7532
7533 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7534 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7535 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7536 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7537
7538 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7539 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7540 non-default base address for the image.
7541
7542 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7543 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7544 filename specified on the command line.
7545
7546 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7547
7548 @example
7549 EXPORTS
7550 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7551 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7552 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7553 @end example
7554
7555 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7556 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7557 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7558 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7559 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7560 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7561 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7562
7563 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7564
7565 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7566 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7567 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7568 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7569 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7570
7571 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7572 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7573 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7574 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7575
7576 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7577 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7578 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7579 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7580 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7581 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7582 application will behave unexpectedly.
7583
7584 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7585 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7586 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7587 API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7588 the DLL without an import library.
7589
7590 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7591 other DEF file statements
7592
7593 @cindex creating a DEF file
7594 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7595 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7596
7597 @item Using decorations
7598 @cindex Using decorations
7599 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7600 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7601 declared as:
7602
7603 @example
7604 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7605 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7606 @end example
7607
7608 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7609 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7610 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7611 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7612
7613 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7614 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7615 instead:
7616
7617 @example
7618 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7619 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7620 @end example
7621
7622 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7623 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7624 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7625 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7626 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7627 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7628 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7629 information.
7630 @end table
7631
7632 @cindex automatic data imports
7633 @item automatic data imports
7634 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
7635 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
7636 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
7637 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
7638 code to these platforms, especially for large
7639 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
7640 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
7641 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
7642 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
7643 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7644 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7645 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7646 trigger the feature's use.
7647
7648 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
7649 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7650
7651 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
7652 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7653
7654 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7655 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7656 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
7657 below.
7658
7659 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
7660 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7661 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7662 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7663 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7664 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
7665 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
7666 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
7667 references.
7668
7669 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7670 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7671 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7672 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7673 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7674 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
7675 run without error on an older system.
7676
7677 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7678 enabled as needed.
7679
7680 @cindex direct linking to a dll
7681 @item direct linking to a dll
7682 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7683 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
7684 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
7685 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
7686 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7687 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7688 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
7689 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
7690 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
7691 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7692
7693 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
7694 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
7695 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
7696 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7697 select the dll instead of an import library.
7698
7699
7700 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7701 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
7702
7703 @example
7704 libxxx.dll.a
7705 xxx.dll.a
7706 libxxx.a
7707 xxx.lib
7708 cygxxx.dll (*)
7709 libxxx.dll
7710 xxx.dll
7711 @end example
7712
7713 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7714
7715 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7716 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7717 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7718 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
7719 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7720
7721 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7722 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
7723 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7724 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7725 could coexist on the same machine.
7726
7727 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7728 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
7729 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
7730
7731 @example
7732 bin/
7733 cygxxx.dll
7734 lib/
7735 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
7736 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
7737 @end example
7738
7739 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7740 done two ways:
7741
7742 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7743 @example
7744 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
7745 @end example
7746
7747 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7748 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7749 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7750 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7751
7752 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7753 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7754 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7755 making the app/dll.
7756
7757 @example
7758 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
7759 @end example
7760
7761 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7762
7763 @example
7764 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
7765 @end example
7766
7767 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7768 perfectly legal
7769
7770 @example
7771 bin/
7772 cygxxx-5.dll
7773 lib/
7774 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
7775 @end example
7776
7777 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
7778 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7779 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7780
7781 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
7782 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
7783
7784 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7785 work with auto-imported data.
7786
7787 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7788 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7789 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7790 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7791 possible to do this without an import lib.
7792
7793 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7794 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7795 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7796 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7797
7798 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
7799 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7800 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7801 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
7802 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7803 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7804 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
7805
7806 @item symbol aliasing
7807 @table @emph
7808 @item adding additional names
7809 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
7810 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7811 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7812 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
7813 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
7814
7815 @example
7816 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7817
7818 EXPORTS
7819 foo
7820 _foo = foo
7821 @end example
7822
7823 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7824
7825 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7826 source code using the "weak" attribute:
7827
7828 @example
7829 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
7830 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
7831 @end example
7832
7833 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7834 symbols.
7835
7836 @item renaming symbols
7837 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
7838 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
7839 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7840 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
7841 created). In the following example:
7842
7843 @example
7844 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7845
7846 EXPORTS
7847 _foo = foo
7848 @end example
7849
7850 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7851 @samp{_foo}.
7852 @end table
7853
7854 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
7855 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
7856 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
7857 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7858 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7859 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7860 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7861 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7862 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7863 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
7864 which is probably not what you wanted.
7865
7866 @cindex weak externals
7867 @item weak externals
7868 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7869 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7870 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7871 are three variants of weak externals:
7872 @itemize
7873 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7874 called lazy externals.
7875 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7876 This form is not presently implemented.
7877 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7878 implemented.
7879 @end itemize
7880 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7881 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7882 uses a default value.
7883
7884 @cindex aligned common symbols
7885 @item aligned common symbols
7886 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7887 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7888 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7889 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7890 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7891 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7892 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7893 warnings about unknown linker directives.
7894
7895 @end table
7896
7897 @ifclear GENERIC
7898 @lowersections
7899 @end ifclear
7900 @end ifset
7901
7902 @ifset XTENSA
7903 @ifclear GENERIC
7904 @raisesections
7905 @end ifclear
7906
7907 @node Xtensa
7908 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7909
7910 @cindex Xtensa processors
7911 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7912 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7913 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7914 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7915 example, with the command:
7916
7917 @smallexample
7918 SECTIONS
7919 @{
7920 .text : @{
7921 *(.literal .text)
7922 @}
7923 @}
7924 @end smallexample
7925
7926 @noindent
7927 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7928 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7929 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7930 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7931 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7932 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7933 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
7934
7935 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
7936 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
7937 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7938 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7939 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7940 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7941 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7942 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7943 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7944 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7945 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7946 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7947
7948 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7949 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7950 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7951 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7952 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7953 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7954 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7955 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7956 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7957 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7958 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7959 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7960 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7961 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7962
7963 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7964 control the linker:
7965
7966 @cindex Xtensa options
7967 @table @option
7968 @item --size-opt
7969 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7970 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7971 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7972 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7973 preserve the correctness of the code.
7974 @end table
7975
7976 @ifclear GENERIC
7977 @lowersections
7978 @end ifclear
7979 @end ifset
7980
7981 @ifclear SingleFormat
7982 @node BFD
7983 @chapter BFD
7984
7985 @cindex back end
7986 @cindex object file management
7987 @cindex object formats available
7988 @kindex objdump -i
7989 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7990 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7991 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7992 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7993 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7994 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7995 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7996 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7997 list all the formats available for your configuration.
7998
7999 @cindex BFD requirements
8000 @cindex requirements for BFD
8001 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8002 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8003 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8004 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8005 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8006 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8007 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8008
8009 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8010 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8011 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8012 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8013
8014 @menu
8015 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8016 @end menu
8017
8018 @node BFD outline
8019 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8020 @cindex opening object files
8021 @include bfdsumm.texi
8022 @end ifclear
8023
8024 @node Reporting Bugs
8025 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8026 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8027 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8028
8029 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8030
8031 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8032 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8033 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8034 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8035 @command{ld}.
8036
8037 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8038 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8039
8040 @menu
8041 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8042 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8043 @end menu
8044
8045 @node Bug Criteria
8046 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8047 @cindex bug criteria
8048
8049 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8050
8051 @itemize @bullet
8052 @cindex fatal signal
8053 @cindex linker crash
8054 @cindex crash of linker
8055 @item
8056 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8057 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8058
8059 @cindex error on valid input
8060 @item
8061 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8062
8063 @cindex invalid input
8064 @item
8065 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8066 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8067 object files are correct.
8068
8069 @item
8070 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8071 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8072 @end itemize
8073
8074 @node Bug Reporting
8075 @section How to Report Bugs
8076 @cindex bug reports
8077 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8078
8079 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8080 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8081 recommend you contact that organization first.
8082
8083 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8084 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8085 distribution.
8086
8087 @ifset BUGURL
8088 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8089 @value{BUGURL}.
8090 @end ifset
8091
8092 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8093 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8094 fact or leave it out, state it!
8095
8096 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8097 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8098 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8099 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8100 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8101 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8102 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8103 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8104 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8105 and the most helpful.
8106
8107 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8108 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8109 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8110
8111 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8112 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8113 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8114 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8115
8116 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8117
8118 @itemize @bullet
8119 @item
8120 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8121 the @samp{--version} argument.
8122
8123 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8124 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8125
8126 @item
8127 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8128 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8129
8130 @item
8131 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8132 version number.
8133
8134 @item
8135 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8136 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8137
8138 @item
8139 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8140 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8141 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8142 sufficient.
8143
8144 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8145 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8146
8147 @item
8148 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8149 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8150 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8151 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8152 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8153 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8154 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8155 attachments are best.
8156
8157 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8158 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8159 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8160 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8161 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8162
8163 @item
8164 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8165 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8166
8167 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8168 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8169 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8170 a chance to make a mistake.
8171
8172 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8173 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8174 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8175 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8176 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8177 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8178 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8179 any conclusion from our observations.
8180
8181 @item
8182 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8183 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8184 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8185 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8186 context, not by line number.
8187
8188 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8189 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8190 @end itemize
8191
8192 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8193
8194 @itemize @bullet
8195 @item
8196 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8197
8198 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8199 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8200 changes will not affect it.
8201
8202 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8203 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8204 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8205 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8206
8207 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8208 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8209 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8210 less time, and so on.
8211
8212 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8213 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8214
8215 @item
8216 A patch for the bug.
8217
8218 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8219 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8220 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8221 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8222
8223 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8224 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8225 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8226 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8227 fixed.
8228
8229 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8230 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8231 help us to understand.
8232
8233 @item
8234 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8235
8236 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8237 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8238 @end itemize
8239
8240 @node MRI
8241 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8242 @cindex MRI compatibility
8243 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8244 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8245 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8246 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8247 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8248 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8249 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8250
8251 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8252 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8253 features to make use of them.
8254
8255 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8256 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8257
8258 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8259 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8260 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8261 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8262 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8263
8264 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8265
8266 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8267 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8268 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8269
8270 @table @code
8271 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8272 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8273 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8274 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8275 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8276 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8277 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8278 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8279 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8280 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8281 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8282
8283 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8284 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8285 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8286 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8287
8288 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8289
8290 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8291 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8292 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8293 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8294
8295 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8296 @item BASE @var{expression}
8297 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8298 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8299
8300 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8301 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8302 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8303 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8304
8305 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8306 @item END
8307 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8308
8309 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8310 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8311 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8312 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8313
8314 @enumerate
8315 @item
8316 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8317
8318 @item
8319 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8320
8321 @item
8322 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8323 @samp{COFF}
8324 @end enumerate
8325
8326 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8327 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8328 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8329 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8330
8331 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8332 same line, with no change in its effect.
8333
8334 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8335 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8336 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8337 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8338 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8339 command line.
8340
8341 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8342 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8343 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8344 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8345 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8346
8347 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8348 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8349 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8350 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8351 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8352 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8353 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8354 file, in the order specified.
8355
8356 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8357 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8358 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8359 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8360 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8361 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8362
8363 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8364 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8365 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8366 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8367 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8368 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8369 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8370 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8371 @end table
8372
8373 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8374 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8375 @include fdl.texi
8376
8377 @node LD Index
8378 @unnumbered LD Index
8379
8380 @printindex cp
8381
8382 @tex
8383 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8384 % meantime:
8385 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8386 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8387 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8388 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8389 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8390 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8391 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8392 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8393 \page\colophon
8394 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8395 @end tex
8396
8397 @bye
This page took 0.241174 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.